JP7276813B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

A gaming machine is known that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can generate a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. In such a gaming machine, the progress of the game is controlled by performing sequential control processing in the control device (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-110126 A

A control device needs to perform a wide variety of control processes, and in the development stage, it is necessary to efficiently create these control processes in a limited period of time. An object of the present invention is to increase the efficiency of development.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Equipped with effect control means for controlling the game,
The production control means is
Arithmetic processing means comprising a plurality of registers ,
Predetermining a group to which each control process belongs to one of the plurality of groups for some or all of the plurality of control processes,
Predetermining an order for each of the groups, and predetermining an order for each of the registers corresponding to the order of the groups ;
Each of the registers has a first size that is a multiple byte size and is usable as a register of the first size, and a register of a second size that is smaller than the first size and is the same can also be used as multiple registers of rank ,
When predetermined control processing is in a relationship of calling one control processing by a call instruction ,
When executing the one control process, the value stored in the register corresponding to the group to which the one control process belongs is saved in a RAM, and the group higher than the group to which the one control process belongs. without saving in the RAM the value stored in the register corresponding to
Further, when the predetermined control process passes a plurality of arguments to the one control process, even if the possible values of the plurality of arguments fit within the second size, the second control process of the same order storing in the second size register of a different order for each argument without storing in a register of the same size ;
Further, when the one control process returns a return value to the predetermined control process , the return value is stored in the register according to a predetermined order in each of the registers.

According to the present invention, the efficiency of development can be improved.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change/confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead big hit determination process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining fall lottery processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during normal figure display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining 2-byte data acquisition processing; It is a flow chart explaining design variation control processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining 1-byte subtraction processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining 1-byte addition processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining effect command setting processing; It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a fanfare/interval process transition setting process; 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/during-interval processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of ROM which a game control apparatus has. It is a figure explaining jackpot determination. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot system command processing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a setting history calendar displayed when changing or confirming probability setting values, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a hole setting screen. It is a flow chart explaining an example of ending production setting processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining an example of setting suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining an example of change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining a modification of ending production setting processing. It is a figure which shows the modification of a hole setting screen. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a first modification of setting suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting history calendar displayed as a setting suggesting effect; FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a second modification of setting suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. It is a figure explaining (a) hole setting screen, (b) player setting screen. It is a flow chart explaining hole setting mode processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining hall volume adjustment processing; 5 is a flowchart for explaining hall LED brightness adjustment processing; It is a flow chart explaining player setting mode processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining player volume adjustment processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a player's LED brightness adjustment process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining minus update processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining plus update processing; It is a program list which shows the program structure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of special figure 2 game processing. 4 is a program listing showing the program structure of fanfare/interval processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of normal figure game processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a process during normal figure display. 4 is a program list showing the program structure of 2-byte data acquisition processing; It is a program list which shows the program structure of design variation control processing. 4 is a program listing showing the program structure of 1-byte subtraction processing; 4 is a program list showing the program structure of 1-byte addition processing; 4 is a program list showing the program structure of effect command setting processing; It is a program list showing the program structure of processing during special figure 1 display. It is a program list showing the program structure of processing during special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the register structure of a production|presentation control apparatus. 4 is a program list showing the program structure of hole setting mode processing; 4 is a program list showing a program structure of hall volume adjustment processing; 4 is a program list showing a program structure of hole LED brightness adjustment processing; It is a program list which shows the program structure of a player setting mode process. 4 is a program list showing a program structure of player volume adjustment processing; It is a program list which shows the program structure of a player's LED brightness adjustment process. 4 is a program list showing the program structure of minus update processing; 10 is a program list showing the program structure of plus update processing; It is a program listing showing the program structure of random number processing. 4 is a program list showing the program structure of range correction processing; It is a figure explaining the relationship of control processing. It is a figure explaining the relationship of control processing. It is a figure explaining an example of specific production in a 1st modification. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in the first modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining specific effect processing in the first modification. It is a figure explaining an example of specific production in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining hole setting mode processing in the 2nd modification. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining custom setting processing in a second modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the player setting mode processing in the second modification. FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining player custom setting processing in the second modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining specific effect processing in the second modification. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining (a) a custom setting screen and (b) a player custom setting screen in the second modified example; It is a figure explaining another example of specific production|presentation in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the relationship of the control process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining another example of specific production|presentation in a 2nd modification. FIG. 13 is a flow chart explaining another example of specific effect processing in the second modified example; FIG. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of adjustment of volume and a brightness|luminance, and specific production|presentation in a 2nd modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to a support frame 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is the front frame 1
2 is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the housing. In addition, the front frame (body frame) 1
2, a glass frame 15 (
transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (
a storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 through which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full. A storage lower tray (receiving tray) 23, an operation section 24 of the ball shooting device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
At the upper edge of the is a production button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player.
A performance button 25 with built-in is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player.
Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. do. Also, the player can press the production button 25 or the touch panel 2
By operating 9, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like can be performed in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 8 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0 is provided. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to approximately the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36. - 特許庁
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 has a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device makes it easy for game balls to flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 Open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal solenoid 37
Although it is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by moving forward and backward (slides) by c, the movable member of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 3
The movable member 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the general electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "H" by the general electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of ".
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (not shown) that advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction.
By doing so, the upper big winning hole is converted into a state in which game balls can flow in. First special variable winning device 3
8, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the upper big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, and by facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper big prize opening, the player is given a predetermined A game value (prize ball) is provided. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area.
(See FIG. 3) is provided with a lever member which is actuated by. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. Occurs (in this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

In addition, inside the upper grand prize winning port, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically this confirmation is performed. The opening of a new upper grand prize opening is not performed until is completed.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. Second special variable winning device 3
At 9, an opening/closing member (not shown) advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction, thereby converting the lower big winning hole into a state in which game balls can flow in. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a winning opening. In addition, the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32
In the lower right corner of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
And a collective display device 50 is provided for executing the normal pattern variation display game.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) etc.
Consists of a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for the variation display game and a special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for the special figure 2 variation display game, and an LED lamp The first memory display unit 53 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second memory display unit 54 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 2 variation display game composed of LED lamps Prepare.

The collective display device 50 also has a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big win (the number of times the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed), and the number of rounds that are advantageous to the player between left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for informing how to beat (a way to beat corresponding to the game state), and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. there is In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a probability state display unit for displaying that the probability state of the big win is high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display that lights up when the big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
In addition, a normal pattern display unit 58 that displays the normal pattern fluctuation display game, a memory display unit 59 for notifying the number of starting memories of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the time saving state occurrence A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the display device 41 is performing the decoration special figure variation display game, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked. To display that it is fluctuating, special figure 1
and special figure 2 are configured to be distinguishable. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment (if it is a special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 stores the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51. ,lighting blinking)
Display by
The second storage display unit 54 is the normal fluctuation winning device 37 that is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display device 52
The number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls (number of starting memories = number of reservations) is turned off and lit (
flashing).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when the special game state is not in progress, all the LEDs are turned off, and in the special game state, the LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. turn it on. The round display section 55 may be configured with a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting), all LEDs are turned off, and left-handed When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (at the time of right-handed hitting), all the LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like.
In the case of the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and in the case of the big win probability state being the high probability state (probability variable state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC power supply that generates a DC voltage of 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure;
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the execution time of the variable display game in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A
constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball outlet switch 38e disposed in the first special variable prize winning device 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing. connected to
An interface chip (proximity I) receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/F) 121 are provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 3
4 a is input to the second input port 123 . Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 3
The detection signal of 2 a is input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation part has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
It is configured such that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value that is assigned a probability value that will be a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, press R while turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position.
By turning on the power of the game machine while operating (depressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is entered, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated (in the probability setting value change mode). ), the probability setting value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and character ratio are displayed.

Also, the state where the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
2 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability set value confirmation mode in which the probability set value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may also be used.
The set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emission color, or the like of one or a plurality of LEDs.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a)
, is also supplied to a test-firing test apparatus (not shown) through the relay board 70 . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123 .

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, first special variable winning device 38
While outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the internal lever member and the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value This is a port for output.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138 c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 , and the external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71 . A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has D as a power supply voltage so as to be able to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V.
C5V is supplied from power supply 400 .
In addition, DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, the magnetic field changes. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, and
It instructs the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructs the reproduction sound to the sound source LSI 314, turns on the decoration lamp, controls the driving of the motor and solenoid, and manages the presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44, etc. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311,
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC when using a low voltage LSI such as
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

FIG. 5 shows the probability of a big win, the probability of a fall, the probability of a small win, and the distribution probability of the types of big wins when winning a big win. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories,
These terms are also used in this specification as terms having similar meanings.

The value of the jackpot probability (probability value), which is the probability of hitting the jackpot (first special result), is the special figure 1 and the special figure 2
, and the probability values in the low-probability state and the probability values in the high-probability state are respectively the probability values shown in FIG. 5(a).
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the same probability value is assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the high probability state. May be assigned a value. That is, the probability value in the high-probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. May be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of steps is not limited as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple steps. Also, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as probability values in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low-probability state may not be switchable in multiple steps.

In addition, the distribution of effects and the like may be made different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low-probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, six probability setting values ("setting 1 ” to “Setting 6”) are assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 1”) are assigned to three types of probability values.
to "setting 3") and the remaining three probability setting values (eg, "setting 4" to "setting 6") may be unused.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being (V passage), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning a drop lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 5(b).
In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

A small hit probability, which is a probability of a small win (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 5(c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate. In this embodiment, the small hit is provided only in the special figure 2 and not in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but is not limited to this. may be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Also, if a small hit is provided for both special 1 and special 2, the small hit probability may be the same for special 1 and special 2, or special 2 is more likely than special 1. may be higher, and the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

In addition, FIG. 5(d) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
The types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game include 10R probability variable jackpot and 4
There are three types of R probability variable jackpot and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and probability variation indicates that there is a high possibility that game balls will flow into a specific area (variability operation area) and that it is likely to become a high probability state (variability state) after the end of the special game state. , It indicates that the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area (probability variable operating area) is low and it is difficult to become a high probability state (probability variable state) after the special game state ends.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which opening control is performed such that winning balls are actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). can be

Also, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is lower than that of the variable probability big win, but the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is higher than that of the normal big win.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operating area). If game balls do not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, the high probability state occurs if the game balls flow into the specific area.

FIGS. 6(a) to 6(c) show opening modes in each round for each jackpot type. Details of the open mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the 10R variable probability big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed to open a specific area (variable probability operation area).
Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility that game balls flow into a specific area (probability variable operating area). After the second round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the 4R probability variable jackpot, the first special variable winning device 3 in the first round
8 is opened and a specific area (probability variable operation area) is opened with V and long opening is performed. From the 2nd round to the 4th round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the V-less long opening is performed, and from the 5th round onward, the first special variable winning device 3 is opened.
8 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. The non-V short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the big winning opening is lower than the non-V long opening. That is, long opening without V is an opening mode in which winning balls are actually generated, and short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning balls are actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), in the 10R normal jackpot, in the first round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variable operation area) is opened. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, from the second round onwards, a V-less long opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
It is the V
Yes long open and V Yes short open only. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which game balls may flow into the specific area, is the first round. Note that the specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. again,
The specific round may be multiple times, such as the 1st round and the 5th round.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), in the long opening without V, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened (t11) with the start of the round, and a predetermined number (
For example, 9 game balls win a prize, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening starts (t12), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (
t13), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), in long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38
f is turned on, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and game balls cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retreats from the specific area and game balls can flow in. becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 milliseconds from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 milliseconds have elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the winning game ball will flow into the specific area immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened.

After 200 milliseconds from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t
34). After 2700 milliseconds have elapsed, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), when the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. (t39). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t39), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t41), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42). . In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Also, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned ON for a predetermined time (t36-t37, t38-t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d is enabled (t36). Since the second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, game balls almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is variable, it will almost certainly be in a high-probability state.

In addition, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept ON for a predetermined period of time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43). It is also possible to flow into the specific area for the game ball that has been played. In addition, the first special variable prize winning device 38
is closed, and when all the game balls that have won the first special variable prize winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the upper grand prize winning opening, the lever solenoid 38f is activated at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). is turned off to end the operation, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled.

In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If the lever solenoid 38f is not completely discharged within the above period and the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period (t43) in which the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF when the discharge is completed. is terminated, the specific area switch 38d is disabled.
In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If not completely discharged by the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is ON ends (t43). As a result, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation ends. In this case, after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43) and 100 milliseconds elapses, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t44).

As shown in FIG. 7(c), in short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

It should be noted that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if game balls remain in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening has passed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining balls is completed. , and the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled. Also, if all the game balls are not ejected by the end of the period (t62) in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which 8f is ON (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the operation ends, and after the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF (t62).
, 100 milliseconds later, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t63).

Also, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in long opening with V shown in FIG. 7(b), and the first special variation in short opening with V shown in FIG. 7(c) The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time that allows the first special variable winning device 38 to win at least one game ball.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), in short opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and a predetermined number (for example, 9 ) is established, the first special variable winning device 38
is closed to end the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare for the predetermined number of winnings, which is the closing condition, to occur, and in most cases the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t72), and when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t73), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

In addition, FIG. 6(d) shows an opening mode in the second special game state (special game state based on a small hit). In the second special game state, first, a small winning fanfare time is started,
When the small winning fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and 160
The second special variable prize winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions that the openable time of 0 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is met. After that, the small winning remaining ball processing time starts, and when the small winning remaining ball processing time ends, the small winning ending time starts, and when the small winning ending time ends, the second special game state ends. In addition, the second
There may be a plurality of types of opening/closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the special game state, and in that case, for example, which opening/closing mode is set (adopted) is determined based on the small winning pattern.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
In the game state, the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST
There are 3. In addition, as the special game state, there is a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the main in the game state A main starting area which is a starting area to be aimed at, a main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and a shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Also, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST1. .

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (when there is V passage), it becomes a high probability state. In addition, there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37.
That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game. It is a state where there is a time saving that shortens the fluctuation time of. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a small hit RUSH. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game in the state with the general electric support (normal pattern probability) is the same probability as the state without the general electric support (normal probability). Not limited to, in a state where there is a general electric support, the general pattern probability can be set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without general electric support means that the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shorter than the state with general electric support. be.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a shorter time state than in the case of the normal game state ST1, and the normal variable winning device 37 is hit to the right. It is advantageous for the player to aim at and play the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the case of this embodiment, the special figure 1 small hit probability is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since the probability of doing so is high, small hits occur with high frequency in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, the state without general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win. Also, in a special game state based on a small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6(d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. The second prize winning device 37 and arranged below the normal variable winning device 37
It does not flow down to the special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur with high frequency, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the first specific game state ST2, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. It flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37 without winning the device 37 . Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur with high frequency and the player's possession of balls increases, so the effect mode is the small hit RUSH.
This mode is called

Among these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 because of the general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, and further,
Since the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, this state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3.

The transition of the game state is carried out by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, completing the specified number of games, and winning the falling lottery, which is the lottery for transition to the low probability state. . Basically, the probability variable jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch If it is detected at 38d (if there is V passage), the transition to the first specific game state ST2 is made after the end of the first special game state. On the other hand, when the variable probability big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage case), after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is no V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special game state Second specific game state ST
3). On the other hand, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special game state It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, the first
When the drop lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. again,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply called hits (special results). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The game ball that is launched is
It flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34, the general prize opening 35, and the start prize opening 36.
, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 . Then, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), a normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37, and a first special variable winning Players can aim to win a prize through the device 38, the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the general winning port 35 arranged to the right of the second special variable prize winning device 39.

In the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), add the normal figure start memory number (+1
) to store one normal drawing start memory in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal pattern display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.
In addition, the normal figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and the normal identification information includes numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, variably display this for a predetermined period of time, and then stop display to display the result.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 58 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electrical solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal variation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the loss.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
), and stores a second start memory forming a start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as first start memory and second start memory. And the number of memories of this starting memory is the first memory display unit 53 (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 , and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (jackpot). If it is, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). Also, during execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100,
It constitutes a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area).

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and it becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display device 51 constitutes first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning hole 36 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a jackpot game state (first special game state)
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability of winning or having general electric support) It is possible to do That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device 41
A decoration special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variable display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without having the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in 0.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is 0), but when it is in the normal game state A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game in FIG. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting the left hand and aiming at the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁
In addition, the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Also, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the game control device 10
0 game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 9, first, processing for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs, is processed. Stack pointer setting process (step X2) to set
I do. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and a predetermined register (for example, D
(step X4). In this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h
or 01h is taken, and the leading 00h is set at step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device 1 acting as main control means
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to start normally according to instructions from 00
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the game machine power wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Also, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired,
Access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the frequency-divided signal.
11A has a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC that triggers random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal (for example, A5h)
(step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. In other words, if the gaming machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
A display as shown in FIG. 13(h) is performed. After that, the on data of the security signal is output and the off data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, return to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speaker 1
The fact that the probability set value is being changed is notified by means of voice output from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, step X29,
After executing the process of X30, the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N)
In other words, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process moves to step X41 to perform the processing for the normal recovery from the power failure.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43
In ;Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform the initialization process. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is on (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the command during probability setting confirmation is produced by the production control board (production control device 300)
(step X37). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
By the light emission of, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
It notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) of the timer interrupt processing when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 milliseconds. However, at least 5
Since it is necessary to output the security signal during 0 ms, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at power-on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34;
N), the process returns to step X33, and when a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 9 and 10) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. Processing for enabling interrupts (step X32
) and before the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122
) is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Then, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command,
The notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set is the area to be initialized (for example, the blackout inspection area,
A power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in a checksum area and an area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). At step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, 0 clear the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area). Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. In step X44,
The stack area and unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
. The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
A support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with the performance number information command and the general electric support, is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, random number to determine the winning pattern of the special pattern (big hit pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), random number to determine the hit of the general pattern (hit random number ), R
After saving in a predetermined area of WM (step X48), interrupts are permitted (step X4
9). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each random number is +1 or -1
, or random update in which all the values within the range appear randomly without duplication until a cycle is completed. In other words, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but the winning pattern of the general pattern is set by providing the winning pattern random number. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process of step X50, the process of prohibiting interrupts (step X51)
to perform performance display editing processing (step X52). Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if the power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process (Step X5
0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

The initial value random number update process in step X50 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (
A game control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122)
to terminate the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , lever solenoid 38f, general electric solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of actuators such as c) is performed. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, random number update processing 1 (step X107),
Random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port 1 switch 3
6a and starting port switch monitoring processing (step X
111). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37
Various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted based on the winning of game balls. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing processing related to the variation display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing processing regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, normal figure game processing for performing processing regarding the normal figure variation display game (Step X114) is performed, and the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display various information related to the display of the special figure fluctuation display game and the game
to display the desired content segment LED editing process (step X115)
I do.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) of checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and determination of whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X1
22) was shown. In this probability setting change/confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
is set the probability setting value display data corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area (current probability setting value) in the RWM (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is sent to the second output port. 134 to the fifth driver 138e (step X134). This will
In the performance display device 153, displays as shown in FIGS. 13(a) to 13(f) are performed.
On the other hand, if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131
;N), set the light-off data as probability set value display data (step X133),
The probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X134). 13(g) in the performance display device 153.
is displayed as shown in .

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type displays) arranged side by side. During the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays indicates the current probability setting value, and the remaining 7-segment displays indicate "SET " is shown.
Specifically, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so as shown in FIG. If the segment indicator displays "1" and the value in the area for probability settings in the RWM is "1", the current probability settings are "1".
Since the setting is 2", "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13(b). probability setting value is "Setting 3
”, “3” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13(c), and RW
If the value of the probability setting value area in M is "3", the current probability setting value is "setting 4", so as shown in FIG. 4" is displayed, and if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "4", the current probability setting value is "setting 5". When "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so FIG.
As shown in 3(f), "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display. Further, when the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 13(g).
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and "T" in the third digit. Probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step X1
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on data of the security signal is output and the off data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). At step X136, security signal ON data is output regardless of whether the security signal control timer has timed out. Therefore, during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are set), the security signal continues to be output.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set ends the probability setting change/confirmation process. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process being executed is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on of the gaming machine 10. It is determined whether it is confirmation processing (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on (step X138; N)
determines whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
At step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is set in the previous input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 . If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change/confirmation process is executed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change/confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5(a), "setting 1" to "setting 6" are applied to three types of probability values (probability values in a low-probability state and probability values in a high-probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the RWM probability setting value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0-2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the game machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability set value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with .
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between a shift operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, if the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode) continues even during the probability set value change mode, that is, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch If the button 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input processing of the timer interrupt processing (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input processing is OFF, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input processing is OFF. When the state is the ON state, an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, the input processing immediately before power-off is the previous input processing, and the input processing immediately after power-on is the current input processing. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is highly likely to be the OFF state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge ) is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and X140 is performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation, Inconvenience may occur that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the processes of steps X139 and X140 are not performed in the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on. It is assumed that As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (
That is, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode is ignored, so unintended updating can be prevented.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result.
An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and storage means for storing one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned. (game control device 100 (RAM 111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability set value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the game machine is powered on. In response to the transition means (game control device 100) and the operation of the second operation unit in the probability set value change mode, the probability set value stored in the storage means (the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM ) for changing the setting change means (game control device 100), and the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value change mode, and the second for changing the probability setting value The operation (change operation) of the operating unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting change means continues from the power-on of the game machine even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit that is being performed.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the gaming machine is powered on continues even after the mode is shifted to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 14 shows the startup switch monitoring process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
11) was shown. In this starting opening switch monitoring process, first, starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36)
A winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and hardware random number acquisition processing (step X49
2). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X49).
3).

Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the starting entrance winning information is set based on the winning of the starting winning mouth 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (Step X494). And, if there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X49
4;Y), the process proceeds to step X497. In addition, if it is not during special figure low probability & time saving (step X494; N), prepare a right hitting instruction notification command (step X495)
, effect command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by display, sound, or the like to instruct the player to hit right. During a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player, and a start prize-winning port 36 that is designed not to win unless left-handed hits during a specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected in the inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, prepare a table for setting hold information by start port 1 (step X497).
, Performs special figure start opening switch common processing (step X498). Next, a winning monitoring table for starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step X499), hardware random number acquisition processing (step X500) is performed, and a jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is starting entrance winning information set in the case (step X501).

If the information with starter winning is not set based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (
At step X501;N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. It should be noted that, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the starter winning information is set based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (step X502), and when the general electric power is in operation (step X502; Y),
Move to step X504. On the other hand, if the general electricity is not in operation (step X502; N)
In step X503, it is determined whether or not an electricity fraud is occurring (step X503).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred.
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the utility power fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more. In addition, if it is not during the general electric fraud occurrence (step X503; N), prepare a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 (step X504), special figure start port switch common processing (step X50
5) is performed to end the starting port switch monitoring process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
FIG. 15 shows the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps X498, X505) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

In this special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, out of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the game machine 1
Load the start signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external control device of 0 (step X521), update the loaded value by +1 (step X522), and determine whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is set to R
Save in the starting port signal output count area of WM (step X524), and the special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the starting door switch to be monitored, that is, the special figure holding (starting memory) number to be updated is the upper limit value ( Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, the value after the update is not saved because it loops and becomes 0 due to the +1 update.

And when the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure pending number to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the special figure pending number to be updated (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) + 1 update (Step X526), save the target starting gate winning flag (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process is saved in the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step X529).

After that, extract and prepare the jackpot pattern random number of the starting port switch to be monitored (step X5
30), save in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM
(step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning to the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X53
4) If there is no winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), a small winning design random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step X536). .

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X53
8). Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step X539), production command setting process (step X540)
To end the special figure start opening switch common processing.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number is used as a first start memory to store up to a predetermined upper limit number. Forms a starting memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and converts the predetermined random number to the second
It constitutes a second start memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start memory.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 show the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538) in the special figure start opening switch common process described above. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether it is during the big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and when it is during the big hit (step X541; Y), special figure reservation information determination End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not in progress (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the winning to the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) is performed. (step X542).

In the case of winning the starting slot 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform prefetching. On the other hand, if it is not a prize to the starting port 1 (step X542; N),
It is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step X543). And, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, no look-ahead is performed. On the other hand, if there is no special figure low probability & short time (step X543; N
), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (step X544).

When not in the special figure high probability (step X544; N), it moves to step X548. On the other hand, if it is in the special figure high probability (step X544; Y), is the fall lottery random number value prepared in step X532 of the special figure start opening switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, a look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), effect command setting processing (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit depending on whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (low-probability-hit-hit judgment value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X551), and prepared in step X530 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number (
Step X552) and move to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X553).

In the case of not winning a prize to the starting port 2 (step X553; N), set stop symbol information of a loss (step X558), and shift to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), small hit determination processing (step X554) for determining whether the big hit random number is a small hit by whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the judgment result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (step X556), and step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557),
Go to step X559. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), set stop symbol information of lost (step X558), and save the stop symbol information acquired at step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set at step X558 in the symbol information area (step X558). X559).

After that, the pre-reading stop symbol command (
low probability) is prepared (step X560), effect command setting processing (step X561)
I do.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and the prediction big hit determination processing (step X563) determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starter switch common processing is performed in step X530. stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is obtained (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
In, the start opening winning flag saved at step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and it is determined whether it is a winning to the starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X567).

In the case of not winning a prize to the starting port 2 (step X567; N), set stop symbol information of a loss (step X572), and shift to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), small hit determination processing (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the judgment result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (step X570), and step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571),
Move to step X573. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), set stop pattern information of the missing (step X572), and determine whether it is in the special figure high probability (step X573).

And when it is not in special figure high probability (step X573; N), it transfers to step X575. On the other hand, if it is in the special figure high probability (step X573; Y), step X55
Overwrite and save the stop symbol information acquired at step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set at step X572 in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information was saved at step X574 (step X574). In addition, the stop pattern information saved in the pattern information area is
It is used for the look-ahead of fluctuation patterns.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (
high probability) is prepared (step X575), effect command setting processing (step X576)
I do. Thus, in this embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result determined by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result determined by the jackpot high probability determination value are the production control device 3
00.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. I do.
Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X579), perform the production command setting process (step X580), and determine the special figure reservation information. End the process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target, and the lookahead stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target A pattern command and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on variation patterns in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加As a result, the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether or not it will fall (whether the probability state of the big hit shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit, etc. , type of variation pattern) determination result (look-ahead result) before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory production control device 30
0, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, and notifying the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It becomes possible to

That is, the game control device 100 serves as determining means capable of determining the result of the variable display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result will be obtained). form a means of prejudgment. It should be noted that the time to determine in advance the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated,
Any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed.

[Look-ahead big hit determination processing]
FIG. 18 shows the look-ahead big hit determination process (step X
549, X563). In this look-ahead big-hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big-hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big-hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). If the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step X584), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, if the judgment flag is not a high probability judgment flag (step X583; N), that is, if it is a low probability judgment flag, an upper limit judgment value in low probability corresponding to the current probability set value is set (step X585). ), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
In FIG. 19, special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y99). The special figure 1 variation display game is performed when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is the second special result (minor win) during execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the second special game state is executed. , is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 suspension flag is not set (step Y99; N), that is, special figure 1
If the variation display game has not been interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y100, and the subsequent processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 suspension flag is set (step Y99; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is suspended, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y100 to Y115 is performed. Without performing, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, first, whether the special figure 2 is in the middle of a big hit/minor hit,
That is, it is determined whether the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variation display game being a big hit or a small hit (step Y100). And when it is during the big hit/minor hit of the special figure 2 (step Y100; Y), it transfers to step Y103. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 big hit/small hit is not in progress (step Y100; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y101) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variation display game becoming a big hit is performed, and the special figure 2 variation display game result is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the big hit or the small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process to be described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. Based on the fact that the specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special game state is performed.

Then, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y103), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). And special figure 1
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y116. Also, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is branched. For this purpose, first, prepare a special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to in a register (step Y10
5), the special figure 1 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y106), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y107). Thereby, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired from the special figure 1 game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y108).

At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Figure 1
Special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do.
At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Special figure 1 display process (
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the final round is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game process number is "5", a process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
Large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 big hit end processing etc. is performed.
At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) I do.

After that, prepare a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (
Step Y116), symbol variation control processing (step Y117) pertaining to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed, and lever solenoid control processing (step Y
118) to end the special figure 1 game process. This special figure 1 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control relating to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game).

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
20 and 21 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the timer interrupt processing described above. In the special figure 2 game processing, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether or not a special game state is being executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variation display game becoming a big hit (step Y130). And, if it is during the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y130; Y)
to step Y133. Also, if it is not during the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1
At 30; N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y131) is performed, and a specific area switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 2 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a big winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. A special game state is generated based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

Then, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y133), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). And special figure 2
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y153. Also, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (step Y135).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y136), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The variable timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y137), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state is very long. (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times of timing using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of timing for a specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number, first, refer to the special figure 2 game sequence branch table is prepared in the register (step Y138), the special figure 2 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y139), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y140). Thereby, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y141).

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Figure 2
Special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 A process during fluctuation (step Y143) is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Special figure 2 display processing (
Step Y144) is performed.

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the large winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", a process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
A large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing is performed.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y1
49).
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y150) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. conduct.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning medium process, or the small winning end. A small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (
Step Y153), the symbol variation control process (step Y154) pertaining to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid control process (step Y
155) is performed to end the special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y201; N), set "0" as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), end the special figure 1 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the instruction to hit left has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. Also, if the left-handed instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing (step Y20
4) is performed to set a left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is designed to be cleared when the specific game state ends, and thereby the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206), and when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y206; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y207), effect command setting process (step Y2
08). After that, a special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) for setting information about the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared (step Y210 ), effect command setting processing (step Y211) is performed.
In addition, at the time of performing the processing (step Y210) for preparing the decorative special figure pending number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 pending number based on the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 pending We are preparing a pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number minus 1 from the number. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y212), and effect command setting processing (step Y213) is performed.

Next, set the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (addition of information) (step Y21
4). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure fluctuation display game, and is 0 to 5
is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither special figure 1 variation display game nor special figure 2 variation display game is executed, special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only special figure 1 variation display game is being performed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 indicates a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. It indicates that there is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuating process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 usual process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start varying in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed and the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is in a state where fluctuation cannot be started, in that case the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y221; N), set "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), end the special figure 2 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 2 can start fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222).

And, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (step Y222; N), prepare the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y223), and perform the production command setting process (step Y224). . After that, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) for setting information related to special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step Y226 ), effect command setting processing (step Y227) is performed. In addition, processing to prepare the decoration special figure pending number command (step Y226)
At the time of performing, the special figure 2 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number minus 1 from the current special figure 2 reservation number are preparing. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y228), and effect command setting processing (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y23
0). Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started here, 2 or 3 as a special figure status
is set. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuating process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is 0
(step Y232). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not in fluctuation (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N),
Performs processing related to customer waiting state setting. Also, if the number of special figures 1 pending is not 0 (step Y
232; N), if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233; Y) or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y235), a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and a presentation is performed. Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses information on the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the probability information command based on the change in the game state. It is possible to return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207, Y223). Thereby, the production control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production corresponding to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. can return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for returning to the performance corresponding to the game state when the performance control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
In FIG. 24 (a), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step Y2
09) was shown. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y241). Then R
Load random numbers from WM's special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) and prepare (step Y242), and clear the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step Y.
243), fall lottery processing for lottery for transition from high probability state to low probability state (step Y24).
4). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1).

Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the losing information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop pattern (symbol information) is performed. Design setting processing (step Y246) is performed. Then, special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, special figure 1 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game
Variation pattern setting processing (step Y249) is performed, variation start information setting processing (step Y250) for setting variation start information for the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and time reduction variation count update processing (step Y251) is performed. . Next, set "1" for special figure 1 fluctuating processing as the processing number (step Y252), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 51
flashing cycle timer) save the initial value (here 100 msec) (step Y257
), the initial value ("0" indicating a blank design here) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y258), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
In FIG. 24 (b), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y2
25) was shown. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y261). Then R
Load random numbers from WM's special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) and prepare (step Y262), and clear the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step Y.
263), fall lottery processing for lottery for transition from high probability state to low probability state (step Y26).
4). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

Next, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the loss information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop pattern (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) it does. Then, to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern, and to refer to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of is set (step Y268).

After that, special figure 2 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game
Variation pattern setting processing (step Y269) is performed, variation start information setting processing (step Y270) for setting variation start information for the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and time reduction variation start update processing (step Y271) is performed. . Next, set "1" for special figure 2 fluctuating processing as the processing number (step Y272), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, a special symbol 2 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), blink control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 52
flashing cycle timer) save the initial value (100 msec here) (step Y277
), the initial value ("0" indicating a blank design here) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y278), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 25 shows the falling lottery process (steps Y244, Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is in effect (step Y581), and if not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the falling lottery process is terminated. Also, if it is in the special figure high probability (step Y581; Y)
In step Y582, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value.
). Winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The drop lottery determination value is a plurality of continuous values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or greater than the drop lottery lower limit determination value, which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery determination value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery determination value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the fall lottery has been won.

If the drop lottery random number is less than the drop lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the drop lottery is not won, the drop lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the fall lottery random number value is not less than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the target fall lottery random number value is greater than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583).
If the drop lottery random number is greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the drop lottery is not won, the drop lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the drop lottery random number value is not greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, a process for shifting to a low probability state is performed.

In the processing for transitioning to the low probability state, first, a signal regarding high probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big win 2 signal is set to ON, and the big win 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O
FF, special pattern 2 high probability state signal OFF, special pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF,
The special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5
86), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and end the falling lottery process. As a result, the low-probability state and general/universal electric power non-supported state are established, and the state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, the information of the end of the high probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 3
00 performs processing such as changing the presentation mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 26(a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step Y282), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step Y283).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y284), and if it is a big hit (step Y284; Y).
, the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the acquired big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is a big hit (step Y286; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y281 (step Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (step Y285) is not a big hit (
At step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, RWM's special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1)
Load and prepare the jackpot random number from (step Y293), special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (
1) is cleared to 0 (step Y294).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y)
to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
At step Y300;N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 27 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y285 and Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first,
A lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N
), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (step Y313).

Then, if it is in the special high probability (step Y313; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y314), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step Y316). Also, if it is not in the special high probability (step Y313; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y315), the target jackpot random number value is the upper limit judgment Determine if greater than value (
step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y31
6; N), that is, if it is a big hit, set a big hit as the judgment result (step Y
318), the big hit determination process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
In FIG. 28, small hit determination processing (step Y29
9) was shown. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (
Step Y322).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y323), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y324), and the small hit judgment process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 29, the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step Y
246). In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), special figure 1
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step Y3
32). Next, a special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (
step Y334). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, a special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), a stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design pattern area (
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here special figure 1 indicator 51)
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 1 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and proceed to step Y340. . These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol withdrawal area (step Y344), and the losing stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 30, the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step Y
266). In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same process as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y3
61; Y), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 jackpot pattern table (step Y
363), acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). A jackpot type is selected by this process.
In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, set the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table (step Y365), acquire the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number and save it in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, a special figure 2 indicator 52)
It is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 2 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. . These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and when it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number Load the small hit pattern random number from the storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y37
6). Next, a special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step Y377), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design saving area (step Y378). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y
379), and proceeds to step Y370.

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern withdrawal area (step Y380), and the losing stop pattern pattern is a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, prepare a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and save it in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
, Clear the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (step Y373), clear the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (step Y374), The stop symbol setting process of FIG. 2 is ended.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) to start the first change display game. It forms the first decision means that can be decided previously. In addition, the game control device 100,
Based on the second start memory stored in the second start memory means, the result and change mode information of the second change display game (special figure 2 change display game) can be determined before the start of the second change display game. Form a possible second decision means. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is configured to is placed at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information about the variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and the second determination in the normal state (normal game state) the variation time that can be determined by the means as the variation time of the second variation display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined by the first determination means as the variation time of the first variation display game; Become.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Examples include variation commands containing information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole special figure 1 game processing.
Furthermore, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means as control information. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time according to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measured time has passed the variation time It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set, but in this case, information about the fluctuation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and long fluctuation It is also possible to transmit a command only indicating that the In the case of a long variation, it is only necessary to simply perform a variable display, so there is no need to determine the performance in detail.
The variable time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the end of the variable time, and the variable display is stopped by the performance control device 300 upon receiving the stop command. make it In this way, the production control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
In FIG. 31, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24
7) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop pattern pattern,
Obtain the second half offset data (step Y402), special figure 1 jackpot, that is, special figure 1
It is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

Also, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reservation number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later.

After that, the second half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y405
), to end the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
Thus, in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the first half variation pattern is determined considering the number of special figure 1 reservations in the case of a loss, and the number of special figure 1 reservations is taken into consideration in the case of a big hit. A variation pattern is determined without

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
In FIG. 32, the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26
7) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step Y421). If it is not in the special low probability & short time (
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427).
. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on is 100 from the end of the special game state.
When it is a special figure variation display game of the times (number of times of support), it is determined that it is the time reduction final variation.

Then, if it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Go to 8. Also, if it is not the time reduction final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop pattern pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
Move to step Y425.

On the other hand, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now on is won, it is determined to be the high probability final fluctuation.
If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), first half offset data and second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Go to 425.
Also, if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). And if it is not a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y42
In 9; N), set the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss/small hit at low probability (step Y430), set the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation (step Y432
), the process proceeds to step Y425.

Also, if the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half variation (variation mode before the start of the reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the second half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y426
), to end the special figure 2 information setting process. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
Thus, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 2 reservations.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the special figure 1 variation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452), and the special The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) in FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, the stop pattern pattern is a lost stop pattern pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is lost (step Y454; Y),
Byte distribution processing (step Y455) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of data capacity saving. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. Also, the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and in order to enable more colorful effects, the size for losing is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 are prepared (step Y458). Next, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y460). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y462). Then, acquire and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y463), the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 and prepared (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), and the special Prepare by loading the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y
473).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, the stop pattern pattern is a lost stop pattern pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is lost (step Y474; Y),
Byte distribution processing (step Y475) is performed. Also, when the special figure 2 is not a deviation (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, obtain the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of sorting and prepare it (step Y477), and load the variation pattern random number 2 from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2 are prepared (step Y478). Next, a sorting process (step Y479) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y482). Then, acquire and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y483), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 2 and prepared (step Y484).
After that, sorting processing (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of being sorted is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing ends. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the fluctuation start information setting process (steps Y250, Y270) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is obtained (step Y553). Further, the second half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step Y555). Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y5
57).

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set. In this case, the above added value is the specified time (here, 60000m
Seconds), the remainder of the time (
time less than 60000 ms) is calculated as an additional value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Also, if the information of special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y559). A long variation is a variation pattern that is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is in a normal game state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

And, if it is not the start of the special figure 2 long fluctuation (step Y559; N), 0 to special figure 2
It is saved in the repetition count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). Also, special figure 2
If it is the start of the long fluctuation (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562).
, Prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (step Y563), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y564). Next, the target pending number is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In this embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for a 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the addition result is 600
Save the 00ms timer and the number of repetitions of 9, and decrement the timer in the timer interrupt process.
set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 long fluctuation is 10 minutes (= 60000 ms ×
10). Since the period of the timer interrupt is 4 milliseconds, up to about 262 seconds can be set with 2 bytes.

[Processing for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations]
FIG. 36 shows the time reduction variation frequency update process (steps Y251, Y271) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether it is in a special figure high probability (in a high probability state) (step Y571), and when it is in a special figure high probability (step Y571; Y), time End the shortened variation count update process. Also, if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572). And, if it is not in the special figure time saving (step Y572; N
), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. Also, if it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation frequency is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation frequency has become "0" (step Y574) .

If the time reduction variation count is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. In addition, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y57
4; Y), a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example,
Special pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special pattern 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF,
Normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF)
is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, save the low probability number in the game state display number area (step Y577), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578
), and save the normal pattern no time saving flag in the normal pattern game mode flag area (step Y579
), and terminates the time reduction variation count update process.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 37, special figure 1 fluctuation process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 1 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the design fixed number of times output frequency (step Y621). Then, load and prepare the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area (
Step Y622), effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y624), effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the game machine of the present embodiment, since there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 . Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In this embodiment, for example, 600
The display time is set to m seconds, and 2000 m seconds in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is lost (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Also, if the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y627;
N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y628). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 being executed is based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit.
This is the case when the variable display game is forced to stop with a losing result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If the special figure 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. In addition, if the special figure 2 is not being displayed during processing (step Y629; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set above as the display time of special figure 2 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of special figure 1 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 2, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decoration special figure 2 is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y636), perform the production command setting process (step Y638), and perform the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step Y638).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y639), load the information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, load the information from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), perform the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643), special figure 1
End the display process.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 38, special figure 2 during fluctuation processing (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game processing described above
showed that. In this special figure 2 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the number of times of pattern determination times output (step Y651). Then, load and prepare the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (
Step Y652), effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y654), effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 ms for a loss, 600 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is lost (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if the special figure 2 is not lost (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y658). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If it is not a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y65
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671 ), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and step Y673
Move to

That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted upon completion of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, if it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If special figure 1 is being displayed during processing (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. In addition, if the special figure 1 is not being displayed during processing (step Y660; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 set above as the display time of special figure 1 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of special figure 2 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 1, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 miss pattern command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y667), perform the production command setting process (step Y668), and perform the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step Y669).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y673), whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit Determine (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675),
Load the information from the special figure 2 big prize opening information area and save it in the big prize opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, load the information from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678), special figure 2 End the display process.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
In FIG. 39, special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y7
51), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753).
, If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variation display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 1 hit signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754)
.

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y755), and the production command setting process (step Y756).
I do. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning hole opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information
is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y764) is performed,
End the special figure 1 displaying process.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, a big hit flag 1
If is outlier information, it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y765), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time reduction final variation (step Y766). . Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined to be the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command Setting processing (step Y768) is performed. Next, save the probability state command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), clear the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y770), and whether the small hit of special figure 2 is in progress, that is It is determined whether or not the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becoming a small hit (step Y771).

When it is during the small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y771; Y), it transfers to step Y774. On the other hand, if it is not during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y771; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 5
6 is turned off, and the display instructs left-handed hitting. After that, clear (information subtraction) during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y774), save the special figure 1 normal processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), special figure 1 End the display process.

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. It should be noted that special figure 2 during display processing, processing equivalent to the above-mentioned special figure 1 during display processing, is intended to perform the special figure 2 as a target. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag 2 areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game A test signal (for example, condition device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y817), and the production command setting process (step Y818).
I do. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the big winning hole open information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning hole opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information
is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y826) is performed,
End the special figure 2 displaying process.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, a big hit flag 2
is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). And, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8
27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y828), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time reduction final variation (step Y829). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final change (step Y828; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final change (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command Setting processing (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small win. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y834),
Effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and special figure 2
Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and processing during special figure 2 display is completed.

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y843), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y84
3;N), it is determined whether it is the time reduction final variation (step Y844). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is 100 times from the end of the special game state (
If it is a special figure variation display game (support number of times), it is determined that it is a time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command Setting processing (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs left-handed hitting. After that, clear (information subtraction) the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y850), save the special figure 2 normal processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), special figure 2 End the display process.

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the conditional device based on the second special result of the variable display game. Eggplant.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 show fanfare/interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare/interval processing, it is first determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y939; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y940).

If it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, if it is the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y941). Here, in the present embodiment, after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game, the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 so that the special game state is started. there is It should be noted that the start condition of the special game state may be established by the game ball passing through a gate provided separately from the normal figure starting gate 34 .

If there is no game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y941; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a game ball passing through the normal pattern start gate 34 (step Y941; Y), a round number upper limit table is prepared (step Y942), and the round number upper limit information is loaded and prepared. (step Y943),
2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y944). The round number upper limit value thus acquired (10 in this embodiment) is saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y94).
5). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the obtained round number upper limit information is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prizes won is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the continuous actuating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
. Then, a round command corresponding to the special prize opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot process control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the initial value of the pointer is saved in the jackpot step control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot is won. A big winning opening opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). As the initial value of the process control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. Also, when opening once in one round, the end value of the jackpot operation (
In this embodiment, 2) is set. Note that the initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of openings and closings in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). A lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
Stop data for the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960). And, if it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960;
In Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960; N), that is, if it is a special figure 2 jackpot, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening time It is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, save the signal related to the opening start of the upper prize-winning hole in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, the first
In order to open the opening and closing member of the special variable prize winning device 38, the upper large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the large winning opening count number for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare/during interval processing ends.

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, only the upper big winning opening (first special variation device 38) is open, In the special game state (second special game state) based on winning, only the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but it is not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing mode in the first special game state may be a mode in which the upper big winning opening is opened in the first round, and the lower big winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 44 shows special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y11
5) was shown. In this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data at step Y1101 does not have time reduction, the jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction at step Y1101, the jackpot end setting processing 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passing information (step Y1104). In this embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operating area),
If the specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1107).

If it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; N), step Y1
109. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passing through the specific area (step Y1107;
In Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108
), effect command setting processing (step Y1109) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include production mode information in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, set "0" related to special figure 1 normal processing as the processing number (step Y1110),
The process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1111). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the winning signal to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114),
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1
115), clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. And special figure 2 game wait time value (
For example, 8 m seconds) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figures 1 and 2, but in the timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to carry out the processing, the processing for starting the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117,
The start processing of the special figure 2 variation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the game control device 100 keeps the second variable display game execution control means in the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the processing related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2. Game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 45 shows special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y14
8) was shown. The special figure 2 jackpot end process is step Y110 in the special figure 1 jackpot process described above.
Equivalent processing is performed except that 9 is not performed. In this special figure 2 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If the time reduction determination data is no time reduction in 1, jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1
132) is performed, and when the time reduction determination data indicates that there is a time reduction at step Y1131, a jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passing information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1137).

If it is not specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; N), step Y1
139. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passing through the specific area (step Y1137;
In Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138
), effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include production mode information in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, set "0" relating to special figure 2 normal processing as the processing number (step Y1140),
The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1141). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the winning signal to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144),
The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag for the fraud monitoring period of the upper prize gate (step Y11
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is terminated. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 46(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of no time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and not output.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and ordinary electric accessories 1 Set the open extended state signal to OFF.
After that, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1153),
Save the general pattern time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step Y1154)
. Next, save the special figure low probability and no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and set the time reduction variation number area to 0 for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1
157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, the normal game state is entered.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 46(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1
161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and normal electric accessories 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1163),
Save the normal map time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1164)
. Next, save the special figure low probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and initialize the time reduction variation number area for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state Save the value (step Y1166). In this embodiment, the number of times of support is 100, so 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, it becomes the second specific game state with a special figure low probability. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, it is a right-handed mode during the time saving state,
Since the right hitting mode is set from the middle of the big win, the right hitting is not set in the big win end setting process 2.例文帳に追加

[Jackpot end setting process 3]
FIG. 47 shows the big hit end setting process 3 (steps Y1105, Y1135) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the start of the special figure time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1
171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON. After that, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1173
), save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1
175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, game state display number 2
The number in the right hitting state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is finished. This processing results in a high-probability state. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 1, it becomes the first specific game state,
By executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the second special figure high probability
It becomes a specific game state.
By the above processing, it becomes possible to set the specific game state, which is a high probability state, after the first special game state ends. That is, the game control device 100 is a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3 with a high probability of special symbols) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game is a special result is higher than the normal state. constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating

[Processing during small win fanfare]
FIG. 48 shows the process (step Y149) during the small hit fanfare in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this small-hit fanfare mid-process, first, a small-hit opening command for opening the lower big winning opening is prepared (step Y1201), and effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Next, set 8 for small hit middle processing as the processing number (step Y1203), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is ON) is the test signal Save in the output data area (step Y1206). and,
Save the lower large winning opening ON data in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y12
07), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the process during small winning fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
In FIG. 49, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y15
2) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 2 normal processing is set as a processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and clear the special figure status area ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special status area,
The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether it is during special low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (step Y133
7), if not in special low probability & short time (step Y1337; N), step Y
Go to 1340. Also, if there is no special low probability & time saving (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (step Y1340).

And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y
) prepares the decoration special figure 1 resume command (step Y1341), and performs the production command setting process (step Y1342). After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
Step Y1343), end the special figure 2 small hit end processing. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variation display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 controls the execution of the first variable display game (game control device 1
00) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100), the execution of one of the variable display games is controlled by the variable display game execution control means.
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means results in a special result, the one variable display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the other variable display game is entered. It constitutes restart control means capable of executing restart control for restarting one of the variable display games that has been interrupted after the end of the game.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the normal game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the normal electric winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. Prepare the normal map game sequence branch table in the register (
Step B5), the general-purpose game processing number is loaded and prepared (step B6), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step B7). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game processing number is acquired from the normal game sequence branch table, and a subroutine call is performed according to the normal game processing number (step B8).

At step B8, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B8, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B8, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern open time is set according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect. Or, during the general pattern display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B8, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B12) is performed.

Further, at step B8, if the general pattern game processing number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern per end processing is performed.
Also, at step B8, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device (step B15), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B16) is performed, and the general-purpose game process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B11) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the normal pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), set "0" for normal game processing as the processing number (step B520), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step B521). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general/electrical fraud monitoring period flag area (step B522), and the general/universal map displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), prepare the process setting table during the hit (step B504), load the general pattern stop pattern information and prepare (step B505), 2 bytes Data acquisition processing is performed (step B506). As a result, the winning start pointer value and the winning end pointer value corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information are acquired from the winning process setting table.

Then, the value of the acquired hit start pointer (for example, "0" or "5") is saved in the control pointer area during the normal hit (step B507), and the acquired value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4" or "7") is saved in the end pointer area per normal pattern (step B50
8). Next, prepare a general electric open time table (step B509), load and prepare general pattern stop pattern information (step B510), and perform 2-byte data acquisition processing (step B511). Thereby, the general electric open time corresponding to the general electric diagram stop design information is acquired from the general electric open time table. Then, the acquired electric power open time (for example, 1700 ms or 260
0 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B512).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the normal per pattern (step B
513), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B514).
After that, the signal related to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the normal pattern 1 hit signal is ON) and the signal related to the normal electric operation start (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 is in operation signal is turned ON) are test signals The data is saved in the output data area (step B515), and the ON data is saved in the general solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general solenoid (step B516).

Furthermore, the information in the electric power count area that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B517), and the electric power that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the ordinary electric fraud monitoring period The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B518). Then, the flag for defining outside the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 (fraud monitoring period outside flag) is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B519), and the process during normal diagram display is completed.

[2-byte data acquisition process]
In FIG. 52, 2-byte data acquisition processing in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing, special figure 2 game processing, fanfare/interval processing, general figure game processing and general figure display processing (steps Y107, Y140, Y944, B7 , B506, B511). In this 2-byte data acquisition process, first, the value of the register input as the pointer is doubled (step Y971), and the calculated value is added to the register input as the reference address (step Y971).
972). Then, 2-byte data is acquired from the address after the addition (step Y97
3) End the 2-byte data acquisition process.

[Symbol variation control process]
FIG. 53 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y117, Y154, B16) in the special figure 1 game process, the special figure 2 game process and the normal figure game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure display unit 58 and setting the display data of the special figure. In this symbol variation control process, first, the address of the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1, special figure 2 or normal figure) is acquired (step Y1401), and it is checked whether the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating. Check (step Y1402)
.

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1403; Y), the pattern display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the pattern to be controlled is acquired (step Y1404), and the flashing control timer associated with the pattern to be controlled An area is prepared (step Y1405), and a 1-byte subtraction process is performed to update the flashing control timer associated with the symbol to be controlled by -1 (step Y140
6), it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, time is up (step Y140).
7).

If the blink control timer value is not 0 (step 1407; N), step Y1412
transition to If the value of the flashing control timer is 0 (step 1407; Y), the flashing control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) is saved in the flashing control timer area of the controlled object (step Y1408). (Step Y1409), to prepare a fluctuation pattern number upper limit judgment value (common in special figures and normal figures) (step Y1
410). Then, 1-byte addition processing is performed in order to update the variable design number related to the design to be controlled by +1 (step Y1411), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable design number area is obtained (step Y1412). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1415), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not fluctuating (step Y1403; N), the symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is obtained (step Y1413). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step Y1414
), save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step Y1415),
The symbol variation control process is ended. As a result, among the special figure 1 display device 51, the special figure 2 display device 52 and the general figure display unit 58, the special figure or general figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display or general figure display unit 58 to be controlled. will be displayed.

[1 byte subtraction process]
FIG. 54 shows the 1-byte subtraction process (step Y1406) in the symbol variation control process described above.
)showed that. In this 1-byte subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the content of the target area is 0 (step Y1421), and if it is 0 (step Y1421; Y), the 1-byte subtraction process ends. If it is not 0 (step Y1421; N), the content of the target area is changed to -
It is updated by 1 (step Y1422), and the 1-byte subtraction process ends.

[1-byte addition processing]
FIG. 55 shows the 1-byte addition process (step Y1411) in the symbol variation control process described above.
)showed that. In this 1-byte addition process, first, the contents of the target area are loaded (step Y1431), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step Y1432), and it is determined whether the updated value is smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1432). Y1433).

If the update value is smaller than the upper limit judgment value (step Y1433; Y), the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435), and the 1-byte addition process ends. If the update value is not smaller than the upper limit judgment value (step Y1433; N), 0 is set as the update value (step Y1434), and the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435).
, ends the 1-byte addition process.

[Production command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X601), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X602). If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step X602; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step X601). If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step X602; N), the command data (MODE) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step X603).

Next, read the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step X604),
It is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X605). If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step X605; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step X604). Also, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step X605; N), the command data (ACTION
) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step X606), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

It should be noted that, in the above-described example, after the special result is derived, the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 as the start condition of the special game state, but as a modification, only the derivation of the special result is the special game state. It may be used as a starting condition. In this case, the processing of FIGS. 57 to 60 is performed.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Instead of the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 39, the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 57 is performed. In this special figure 1 display processing, when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), FIG.
Steps Y942 to Y94 performed in the fanfare/interval processing shown in
6 is processed. In addition, in the processing (step Y754) of saving the test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) in the test signal output data area, the condition device operating signal is turned ON and the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned ON, and the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned ON.

[Special figure 2 display process]
Processing during special figure 2 display shown in FIG. 58 is performed instead of processing during special figure 1 display shown in FIG. In this special figure 2 display processing, when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), FIG.
Steps Y942 to Y94 performed in the fanfare/interval processing shown in
6 is processed. In addition, in the processing (step Y816) for saving the test signal related to the start of the special figure 2 variation display game jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) in the test signal output data area, the condition device operating signal is turned ON and the special pattern 2 hit signal is turned ON, and the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned ON.

[Fanfare/In-interval processing transition setting processing]
In FIG. 59, fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y764, Y826
)showed that. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big win (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON.
Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time The shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special game mode is executed. Toku-zu low probability, saving no time saving flag in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, save the normal pattern no time saving flag in the normal pattern game mode flag area (step Y8
76), save the command output to the production control device 300 when the power failure is restored save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y877), special figure fluctuation that can be executed in the time saving state A time reduction variation count area for managing the number of executions of the displayed game is cleared (step Y878). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving operation state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and normal operation state are entered.

Next, save the big hit information in the special figure status area (step Y879), save the signal related to the right hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and save the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y881). After that, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings for the top special winning opening is cleared (step Y882), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the top special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y883), and fanfare/interval process transition setting processing is performed. exit.

In addition, even in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (steps Y764, Y826) in the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 39 and the special figure 2 displaying process shown in FIG. there is

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Instead of the fanfare/during interval processing shown in FIG. 42, the fanfare/during interval processing shown in FIG. 60 is performed. In this fanfare/during-interval processing, steps Y940 to Y949 are not performed. These processes are performed by the processes of FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG.

Next, FIG. 61 shows an example of the data structure of the ROM 111B.
The ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is shown in FIG.
As shown in a), there are a program/data area in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area in which arbitrary data such as a program title and version can be set, and a start address of a subroutine of the CALLV instruction and timer allocation. It has a vector table area in which a table for setting the start address of the loading process is stored, and an HW (hardware) parameter area in which parameters for setting the internal functions of the game microcomputer 111 are stored. ing.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the program/data area includes, in order from the beginning, a program area 111Ba in which various programs are stored, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc in which various fixed data are stored. and a second unused area 111Bd. When the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset is generated.

In the data area 111Bc, as shown in FIG. 61(b), an area A1 for an upper limit judgment value table for storing an upper limit judgment value table used for judging a big hit, and a performance display for storing data related to performance display Areas for various data such as area A3 for data are provided. An unused area A2, to which access is prohibited, is provided between the upper limit judgment value table area A1 and the performance display area A3 in the data area 111Bc. and C.
An illegal access reset is generated when the PU 111A accesses the unused area A2.

The CPU 111A sets an upper limit judgment value among low probabilities corresponding to the current probability set value in step X585 of the prediction big hit judgment process (FIG. 18) and step Y315 of the big hit judgment process (FIG. 27). At that time, with the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer, R
The upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is obtained from the OM 111B and set.
Further, the CPU 111A sets an upper limit judgment value among high probabilities corresponding to the current probability set value in step X584 of the look-ahead big-hit judgment process (FIG. 18) and step Y314 of the big-hit judgment process (FIG. 27). At this time, by using the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer, the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is obtained from the ROM 111B and set.

In the look-ahead big-hit determination process and the big-hit determination process, the process of determining whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) is not performed. for that reason,
Even when the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is outside the normal range, data is acquired from the ROM 111B using the value (abnormal value) as a pointer. Thus, for example FIG.
2, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other. In such a case, it is impossible to accurately judge a big hit, and there may be inconveniences such as being extremely likely to hit a big hit or being extremely difficult to hit a big hit.

Specifically, when the upper limit judgment value table area A1 and the performance display area A3 are adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "5" (within the normal range), by using this value as a pointer, the upper limit judgment corresponding to "setting 6" in the low probability values, i.e. exact data can be obtained. On the other hand, if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "7"
When it is (outside the normal range), by using the value as a pointer, the data stored in the area A3 for performance display, that is, erroneous data is obtained. The same applies to the case of acquiring the upper limit determination value in the high probability from the ROM 111B.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
An unused area A2 is arranged immediately after 1. As a result, when the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, if the value is used as a pointer to acquire the upper limit judgment value from the ROM 111B, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 Since access will be made, an illegal access reset will occur. As a result, it is possible to initialize the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM and to inform the abnormality.

Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and main processing (FIGS. 9 and 10) is started. At that time, the power failure detection process (steps X55 to X61) is not executed before the restart, so in the main process after the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1. (Step X
16; N). At that time, the setting change operation (setting key switch 152 and R
Since the operation of the AM initialization switch 112) is not performed, in the main processing after the restart, it is determined that both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off (step X21; N). Therefore, since the processes of steps X25 and X26 are executed, a setting change operation is requested, that is, an abnormality is notified. Then, by this request (notification), the gaming machine is turned on again while the setting change operation is being executed, so that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is initialized ( step X28).

As shown in FIG. 61(c), the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table is replaced with the data area 1.
11Bc may be placed at the end. In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is outside the normal range. do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, when the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is outside the normal range, the value is used as a pointer to read the upper limit from the ROM 111B. An attempt to acquire the determination value results in access to the second unused area (access-prohibited area) 111Bd, resulting in an illegal access reset.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes control means (game control device 100 (CPU 111A)) for controlling a game, and storage means (game each storage area included in the area for the probability value table (area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table) among the plurality of storage areas of the storage means, the storage area The control means stores the probability values assigned to the probability setting values corresponding to Information (data) is acquired from the corresponding storage area, a game lottery (jackpot determination) is performed using the information, and in the storage means, an area for the probability value table is followed by an unstored area where no information is stored. Used area (unused area A2, second unused area 11
1Bd) are arranged (see FIGS. 61(b) and (c)).
With this configuration, when the probability setting value stored in the storage means (the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM) is outside the normal range, the unused area (unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) is accessed. That is, since the lottery itself is not executed when an accurate lottery result cannot be obtained, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes extremely easy to win the lottery or extremely difficult to win the lottery.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 63 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 63, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, a hall setting mode process is performed for accepting settings of changeable ranges such as brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume (step C10). Processing is performed (step C11). Next, random number update processing (step C1
2).

Next, a received command check process (step C13) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C14) for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C15). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C16). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C16 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C16; N), the process of step C16 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C16 that it is time to switch frames (step C16; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, sound control processing (step C18) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C18) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C19), a movable body control process (step C20) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the reel 6 is performed, and the board for controlling effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, etc. The effect setting process (step C21) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 64 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the receive command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
Return to the process of step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 65 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Further, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the pending number command and error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Processing of variable commands]
FIG. 66 shows the variable command processing (step C2) in the received command analysis processing described above.
36) was shown. In this variation-based command process, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command process described above.

If this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, check the combination of the variation command and the symbol command (
Step C362), it is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C
363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63;N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, winning symbols, 16R big-hit symbols, 10R big-hit symbols, small-hit symbols, and the like. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent means that the variation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command for the 16R jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a contradictory combination (combination of variation command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variable performance setting process for setting information for performing performance corresponding to the variable command is performed (step C365).

Next, the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is set to special figure fluctuation (step C366
). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of look-ahead effects (the number of look-ahead execution times) is not zero, the number of look-ahead effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of look-ahead effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process ends.

[Jackpot command processing]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot command processing (step C
238). In this jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, if the MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big win or small win is performed (step C402), and the state of the P machine is set to fanfare. After setting (step C403), the jackpot command process is terminated.

If MODE is not fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. If the MODE is round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information is performed (step C405), the P machine state is set to be in a round (step C406), End the jackpot command processing.

If MODE is not round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is interval (step C407). That is, it determines whether the received command is an interval command relating to the interval between rounds. When the MODE is interval (step C407; Y), interval performance setting processing for setting the performance during the interval is performed (step C408), the state of the P machine is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is won. End system command processing. If MODE is not interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command relating to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small win.

When MODE is ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect at the end of a big hit or a small win is performed (step C4
11), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the big win system command processing is terminated. Also, if MODE is not the ending (step C410; N),
It is determined whether MODE is count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on the winning to the special variable winning device.

If the MODE is not count (step C413; N), the jackpot system command processing is terminated. If the MODE is count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to the winning to the special variable prize winning device 38 is performed, and the big win system command process is finished.

<Setting suggestion production>
The production control device 300 can store the setting history of the probability setting values in the FeRAM 323, and can execute the setting suggestion production suggesting the past or present probability setting values based on the setting history.
When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command (step X42) or a RAM initialization command (step X46) to the effect control device 300. FIG. These commands include a probability setting information command (a command indicating the current probability setting value), and the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, for example, when receiving the probability setting information command, the probability setting information Based on the command and information (information indicating the current date and time) from the RTC 338, the current probability setting value and the current date (current date) are associated and stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323.
Note that an upper limit (for example, 90 days) may be provided for the probability setting values that can be stored in the setting history area. In that case, for example, when the probability setting information command is received when the upper limit is reached, the probability setting value corresponding to the oldest date is cleared, and the probability setting value corresponding to the newest date (current date) are stored.

If the probability setting information command is received multiple times on the same day, CP of the production control device 300
For example, the U311 overwrites the probability setting value corresponding to the current date (probability setting value associated with the current date) stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323 with the latest probability setting value. Therefore, the probability set value last set on that day remains as a history.
Note that the probability setting value that remains in the setting history area is not limited to the probability setting value that was set at the end of the day and can be changed as appropriate. Alternatively, it may be a set probability value that was set at a predetermined point in time (for example, noon) on that day. In that case, for example, the latest probability setting value is stored as the probability setting value corresponding to the current day until a predetermined timing of the day (for example, when the power is turned off). The corresponding probability setting value (that is, the probability setting value that was set for the longest time on the day, the probability setting value that was set at a predetermined time on the day, etc.) is stored as the probability setting value.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, notification is made that the probability setting value is being changed based on the reception of the probability setting change command (step X30), and the probability setting confirmation command (step X37) is received Based on this, notification is made to the effect that the probability set value is being checked. The effect control device 300 may notify the setting history of the probability set value during execution of these notifications.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), a setting history calendar created based on the information (dates and probability setting values) stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323 is displayed on the display device 41. can be As a result, the game store clerk or the like can change or confirm the probability setting value while referring to the past probability setting value.
In the example shown in FIG. 68(a), the area corresponding to the current date (20XX year △ month 31) is surrounded by a bold frame.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 68(a), since the setting history calendar displayed when the power is turned on for the first time on that day is shown, the probability setting No value shown. That is, when the probability setting value is changed or confirmed at the first power-on of the day, the first probability setting information command of the day is transmitted after the change or confirmation is completed. , the probability setting value corresponding to the current day is not stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323 . Therefore, the probability setting value corresponding to the current day cannot be displayed in the setting history calendar displayed when the power is turned on for the first time on that day.

FIG. 68(b) shows an example of the setting of the game machine by the operation of the store clerk of the game parlor. For example, when the production button 25 is pressed twice while the customer is waiting and the front frame 12 is opened, the hole setting mode is entered, and the hole setting screen shown in FIG. be done.
In the example shown in FIG. 68(b), the items that can be set on the hall setting screen are "volume setting" for setting the upper limit of the range in which the volume can be changed in the player setting mode, and for decoration in the player setting mode. Sets the upper limit of the range in which the brightness of the LEDs used can be changed.
An item of "upper limit of player adjustment" for setting whether to enable or disable the upper limit set in "LED brightness setting", "volume setting", and "LED brightness setting" is displayed. Moreover, the display device 4
"LCD brightness setting" to set the brightness of 1, "Power saving setting" to set the presence or absence of power saving mode,
The item "logo color setting" for setting the display color of the logo is displayed. Further, items of "setting history record" for setting whether or not to store the setting history of the probability setting value, and "setting suggestion effect" for setting whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect and its contents are displayed. These items display the current settings in an identifiable manner. Also displayed are an item for exiting the hall setting mode and a "factory default setting" item for returning to the factory default settings.

Although not shown in FIG. 68(b), the hole setting screen may display an explanation of the operation on the hole setting screen. On the hole setting screen, for example, by performing an operation of touching either the top or bottom of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the production button 25, an item can be selected (the cursor is moved), and an operation of touching either the left or right of the touch panel 29 is performed. This allows you to change your current settings.

The currently selected item is indicated by the cursor surrounding the item and highlighting it, and in the example shown in FIG. In the item of "setting suggestion effect", "OFF" is a setting that does not perform a setting suggestion effect, and "ON (day of the week)" is a setting suggestion according to the probability setting value set on the same day of the week as the current day of the week. This is a setting to perform an effect, and "ON (one week)" is a setting to perform a setting suggestion effect according to the probability set value set in the most recent one week including the current day, an example shown in FIG. Then select "ON
(one week)" is selected. That is, on the hole setting screen, it is possible to select whether or not to execute the setting suggesting effect, and the content (type) of the setting suggesting effect to be executed.
In the item "setting history record", "OFF" is a setting that does not store the setting history of probability setting values, and "ON" is a setting that stores the setting history of probability setting values.
In the example shown in b), "ON" is selected. That is, on the hole setting screen, it is possible to select whether or not to store the setting history of the probability setting values.

The performance control device 300 displays a hall setting screen on the display device 41 to accept the setting of the gaming machine operated by the store clerk of the game parlor, or displays the player setting screen on the display device 41 to play a game operated by the player. Hall/player setting mode processing (step C10) is performed as a processing for accepting machine settings. In the hole/player setting mode process, for example, when the current setting of the "setting suggestion effect" is changed on the hole setting screen, the settings after the change (the setting suggestion effect execution existence and contents) are overwritten.
Also, for example, when the current setting of "record setting history" is changed on the hole setting screen, F
The settings after the change (whether or not there is a setting history record) are overwritten in the setting suggestion effect area of the eRAM 323 . Also, for example, when the factory settings are selected in the "factory settings" on the hall setting screen, the information stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323 (
date and probability setting value) are all cleared.

When CPU311 of production control control equipment 300 receives probability setting information command, FeRA
Presence or absence of setting history record stored in area for setting suggestion effect of M323 (ON/OFF)
If "Yes (ON)" is stored, an area for the setting history of FeRAM 323 and an area for the probability setting value of FeRAM 323 (for the probability setting value in the RWM of the game control device 100 area corresponding to the area) and the current probability setting value is stored. On the other hand, "None (OFF
)” is stored, the current probability setting value is stored only in the probability setting value area of the FeRAM 323 .

In this embodiment, the effect control device 300 changes the color of the logo displayed on the display device 41 at the end of the ending effect executed during the first special game state (special game state based on the big hit) as the setting suggestion effect. , Effect of displaying in a setting suggesting color (for example, silver) different from the normal color (color that can be set on the hole setting screen) is executed.
In addition, as a setting suggestion effect, a "day of the week setting suggestion effect" that is executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined value among the probability setting values set for a predetermined day of the week (the same day of the week as the current day of the week); "Period setting suggestion effect" that is executed when there is a set probability value greater than or equal to a predetermined value among the set probability values set in a predetermined period (last week including the current day), and the current set probability value It is possible to execute a "suggestion effect for setting on the day" which is executed when the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the predetermined day of the week is the same day of the week as the current day of the week. In other words, the “day of the week setting suggesting effect” is performed when there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined value among the probability setting values set for the same day of the week as the current day of the week. The day of the week may be different from the day of the week. Also, it may be possible to select which day of the week to use on the hall setting screen or the like.
Also, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period is the most recent week including the current day. i.e. “
The "Period Setting Suggestion Effect" is an effect that is executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined value among the probability setting values set in the most recent week including the current day. It is not limited to the most recent week including, for example, it may be the most recent week that does not include the current day, it may be the most recent month that includes (or does not include) the current day, or it includes the current day It may be (or not include) the most recent three days, or the length of the period and whether or not to include the current day may be selected on the hole setting screen or the like.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 69 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-described jackpot command process (FIG. 67). In this ending effect setting process, first, the ending effect is set based on the information on the kind of big win that triggered the occurrence of the special game state, the information on the kind of small win or the like (step C451), It is determined whether or not the set ending effect is the ending effect of executing the logo display effect (step C452).
). Here, the logo display effect is an effect executed at the end of the ending effect, and is an effect of displaying the logo on the display device 41 in the color set in the "logo color setting" on the hall setting screen.

If the set ending effect is not the ending effect of executing the logo display effect (step C452; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the set ending effect is the ending effect of executing the logo display effect (step C452;
Y) performs setting suggestion effect determination processing (step C453).
Then, if execution of the setting suggestion effect is not determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C454; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to execute the setting suggesting effect in the setting suggesting effect determination process (step C454; Y), the setting suggesting effect is set instead of the logo display effect (step C455), and the ending effect setting process ends.

By performing the processing of step C455, instead of the logo display effect of displaying the logo in the color set in the "logo color setting" on the hole setting screen, the setting suggestion effect of displaying the logo in the setting suggestion color is executed. It will be done. In addition, the setting suggestion color is not limited to colors that cannot be set on the hole setting screen. It may be a color other than the color set in "color setting".
Also, the setting suggesting effect may be different from the logo display effect in terms of display mode. That is, the setting suggestion effect includes the display color, size, display position, and movement of the logo, and the display color, size, display position, and movement of images other than the logo (for example, character images and character images) displayed in the logo display effect. , background color, etc. in the logo display effect may be different from the logo display effect.

[Setting Suggestion Effect Judgment Processing]
FIG. 70 shows the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453) in the above-described ending effect setting process (FIG. 69). In this setting suggestion effect determination process, first, it is determined whether the number of acquired balls (total number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area) from the time the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present is a specified number (for example, 5000) or more. Determine (step C461). Prize-winning switch/
In the state monitoring process (step X109), from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the winning detection command corresponding to the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 3
Winning detection command corresponding to the starting port 1 switch 36a of No. 6, winning detection command corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 38, 39 To the large winning mouth switches 38a, 39a A corresponding winning detection command is transmitted, and the effect control device 300 can calculate the number of winning balls based on these commands.

If the number of balls obtained after turning on the power is not equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461; N), the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. As a result, when the number of balls obtained and put out after the power is turned on is less than the specified number, the setting suggestion performance is not executed, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance can be suppressed.
On the other hand, when the number of balls obtained after the power is turned on is equal to or greater than the prescribed number (step C461; Y)
determines whether the current base value is greater than or equal to the specified value (step C462). In the performance display editing process (step X52), a command relating to the base value and the character ratio displayed on the performance display device 153 is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device In 300, the current base value can be grasped based on this command. Here, the base value is the payout based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the winning in the winning area. It is a value calculated from a number. In addition, the role ratio is the number of all prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the prize mouth from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending It is the ratio (so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth (excluding the inside).

If the current base value is not equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462; N), the setting suggestion determination process is terminated. Thereby, when the current base value is less than the prescribed value, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect can be suppressed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment is that there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined value in the past or current probability setting values, that is, the past or current jackpot probability value (probability value) is relatively high. If the current base value is high (if the current base value is greater than or equal to the specified value)
The reliability of the setting suggestion effect can be enhanced by executing the setting suggestion effect only on the . In addition, before determining whether the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462), it is determined whether the number of balls obtained after the power is turned on is equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461). Based on such a base value, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect.

It should be noted that the larger the prescribed number of balls acquired, the more accurate the base value can be obtained, but if the prescribed number of acquired balls is too large, the It takes time until the setting suggestion effect becomes executable). Therefore, the specified number of acquired balls is set in consideration of these balances.
Also, the prescribed value of the base value is, for example, the lower limit of the designed normal range of the base value.
Since the design normal range of the base value differs depending on the current probability setting value, that is, the current jackpot probability value (probability value), in step C462, the current base value is set to the normal range corresponding to the current probability setting value. Determine if it is greater than or equal to the lower limit of the range. Also, in step C462,
It is determined whether or not the current base value is within the normal range corresponding to the current probability set value, and if not within the normal range, the setting suggestion effect determination processing is terminated, and if within the normal range, step C
463 can also be configured. Also, in step C462, the current role item ratio may be determined instead of the current base value.

On the other hand, if the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462; Y), FeRA
ON/OFF of execution of setting suggestion effect stored in area for setting suggestion effect of M323 (
presence/absence) is OFF (step C463), and if it is OFF (step C
463; Y) ends the setting suggestion effect determination process. As a result, when OFF is selected in the item "setting suggesting effect" on the hole setting screen, the setting suggesting effect is not executed.
Also, if the execution of the setting suggestion effect is ON (step C463; N), the FeRAM
It is determined whether the ON/OFF (presence/absence) of the setting history record stored in the setting suggestion effect area 323 is OFF (step C464), and if it is OFF (step C464;
Y), that is, when the probability setting value setting history is not stored, the probability setting value (that is, the current probability setting value) stored in the area for the probability setting value of the FeRAM 323 exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, the setting 4) Determine whether the number is equal to or greater than (step C468). Then, if the current probability setting value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value (step C468; N), the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. Also, if the current probability set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (step C468
;Y) decides to execute the setting suggestion effect (step C469), and ends the setting suggestion effect determination process.

On the other hand, if the setting history record is ON (step C464; N), the FeRAM 323
(step C465). Then, if it is not "day of the week" (step C465; N), that is, if it is "one week", each probability set in the most recent week including the current day from the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323) values are extracted, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, set 4) among these probability set values (step C466)
. Then, if there is no set probability value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold among the set probability values for the most recent week (step C466; N), the setting suggestion effect determination processing is terminated. Further, when there is a set probability value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value among the set probability values for the most recent week (step C466; Y), execution of setting suggestion effect is determined (step C469), and setting suggestion effect determination processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is "day of the week" (step C465; Y), the setting history (FeRAM 323
area for setting history), each probability setting value set for the same day as the current day of the week (including the probability setting value corresponding to the current day) is extracted, and a predetermined threshold ( For example, it is determined whether there is a probability set value equal to or greater than setting 4) (step C467). Then, if there is no set probability value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold among the set probability values for the same day of the week as the current day of the week (step C467
;N) ends the setting suggestion effect determination process. Further, when there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold among the probability set values for the same day of the week as the current day of the week (step C467; Y), execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C469), and the setting suggestion is performed. Terminate the effect determination process.

In addition, in the setting suggestion effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the number of balls obtained after the power is turned on is equal to or greater than a specified number (step C461) and whether or not the current base value is equal to or greater than a specified value (step C462). At least one of them may be omitted.
Also, the processing of step C462 may be performed after the processing of steps C466 to C468. That is, in the setting suggestion effect determination process, if there is no set probability value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold among the set probability values for the most recent week including the current day (step C466; N), set the probability for the same day of the week as the current day of the week. If there is no set probability value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value among the values (step C467
; N), or if the current probability setting value is not equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (step C468;
N), it is determined whether the current base value is greater than or equal to the specified value (step C462), and if the current base value is greater than or equal to the specified value, it may be determined to execute the setting suggestion effect. In this case, the specified value of the base value is, for example, the lower limit of the normal range in design of the base value when the probability setting value is a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4). Setting suggestion when there is no set probability value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold among the past or present set probability values, but the actual set probability value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (i.e., when ball output is favorable) Since the effect is executed, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the setting suggesting effect without lowering the reliability of the setting suggesting effect. Also, in this case, before determining whether the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462), it is determined whether the number of balls obtained since power-on is equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461). is preferred.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect is the display of the display device 41, the LE of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
Any effect that suggests the past or present probability set value by light emission of D, operation of the board effect device 44, sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like may be used.
Also, the setting suggesting effect is not limited to one that is executed in place of the logo display effect that is executed at the end of the ending effect. That is, the setting suggestion effect may be executed instead of any of the effects executed in the gaming machine 10 . For example, if the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any effect that is executed during the fanfare effect, the setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 70) is performed in the fanfare effect setting process (step C402). will be Further, if the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any effect executed as the effect (prefetch effect) related to the unexecuted special figure variation display game, the prefetch symbol system command processing (step C244) Alternatively, setting suggestion effect determination processing (FIG. 70) is performed in the look-ahead variation command processing (step C246). Further, if the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any effect executed as the effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed, the variable effect setting process of the variable system command process (step C365) , setting suggestion effect determination processing (FIG. 70) is performed.
Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed instead of, for example, the notice effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed. A variable effect setting process is executed.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 71 shows the variable effect setting process (step C365) in the variable command process described above.
) shows an example. In this fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is reachless fluctuation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381; Y), the model code, the special figure type, and the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode are set (step C382). In addition, since there is no reach fluctuation, the symbol type is always a lost symbol, and the symbol type need not be particularly referred to here. In addition, the production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300, and naturally differs depending on the model, but here there are a normal mode, a chance mode, a small hit RUSH, and the like. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in each mode in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is obtained (step C383).
. As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effect appearing during each change (specifically, the rate of appearance of each notice effect mode) according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half advance notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. A lottery for the advance notice that appears in .

Next, the advance notice effect of the second half fluctuation is drawn by lottery. In addition, the second half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a combination of special patterns) in which the display area excluding the specific area among the display areas of multiple rows of special figures is a big hit. is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is the variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, a late notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the performance mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table. Then, referring to the second half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for the notice to appear is performed (step C389).
.

After that, determine the contents of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT (step C390),
The content of the presentation corresponding to the result of the preliminary announcement lottery is determined (step C391). As a result, the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the production and notice such as the main reach content are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol by referring to the determined special figure variation display game variation pattern (such as a ready-to-win effect), the content of the notice, and the game state is performed (step C392).
).
Next, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (
Step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute the effect and notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect among the notice effects that have been set for display in step C394 (step C399a), and if there is no changeable notice effect to the setting suggestion effect (step C399a) C399a;N) moves to step C395. Also, if there is a changeable advance notice effect in the setting suggestion effect (step C399a; Y), a setting suggestion effect determination process is performed (step C399b). As a result, for example, setting suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 70 is performed.
Then, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is not determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C399c; N), the process proceeds to step C395. Further, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C399c; Y), the setting suggestion effect is displayed instead of the notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect (step C399d), and step C399d is performed. C39
Go to 5.

For example, if the notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect is the effect of displaying the main character during reach, and the setting suggestion effect is the effect of displaying the character for setting suggestion during reach, the notice effect By setting the setting suggestion effect to be displayed instead of the main character, the character for setting suggestion appears during reach. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the past or present value of the jackpot probability (probability value) is relatively high.

Then, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, setting is made to reduce the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the reduction of the corresponding starting memory when starting the special figure fluctuation display game.
Then, set the sound number, which is the BGM number, the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp, etc. (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (variation display of identification information) Display settings are made (step C397). Furthermore, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variable display game separately from the variable display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variable corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , ends the variable effect setting process.

Also, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means (the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29). Specifically, the setting suggesting effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means during the logo display effect executed at the end of the ending effect. Instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69, for example, an ending effect setting process as shown in FIG. 72(a) is executed.

[Ending effect setting process]
In FIG. 72(a), the ending effect setting process (
A modification of step C411) is shown. In the ending effect setting process, when execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined in the setting suggesting effect determination process (step C454; Y), the change reservation from the logo display effect to the setting suggesting effect, that is, during the logo display effect, the operating means When there is a predetermined operation for , a reservation for ending the logo display effect being executed and starting the setting suggesting effect is set (step C456).
By setting the change reservation in this way, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means while the logo display effect is being executed, the setting suggesting effect is executed instead of the logo display effect. However, it will change from the color set in the "logo color setting" on the hole setting screen to the color for setting suggestion. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the value of the past or present jackpot probability (probability value) is relatively high.

Further, the setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect to be executed instead of the effect to be executed, and may be an effect to be executed in addition to the effect to be executed, for example. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be an effect that is additionally executed during the ending effect, and in that case, the effect control device 300 performs, for example, Ending effect setting processing as shown in FIG. 72(b) is executed.

[Ending effect setting process]
In FIG. 72(b), the ending effect setting process (
A modification of step C411) is shown. In this ending effect setting process, first, the ending effect is set based on the win type information (step C451), and a setting suggestion effect lottery is performed for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect (step C457a). Then, if the setting suggestion effect lottery is not won (step C457b; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated, and if the setting suggestion effect lottery is won (step C457b; Y), the setting suggestion effect determination process is executed. (step C453).

Then, if the execution of the setting suggestion effect is not determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C454; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated, and if the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed in the setting suggestion effect determination process. (Step C454; Y) sets a setting suggestion effect (step C457c), and ends the ending effect setting process. For example, the setting suggestion production is
LE that decorates the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 among the LEDs of the board decoration device 46
In the case of the effect of blinking D, by setting the setting suggestion effect (step C457c), at a predetermined timing during the ending effect, the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37
The LED that decorates will blink. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the value of the past or present jackpot probability (probability value) is relatively high.
Here, steps C457a to C457a in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG.
The processing of C457b may be omitted.
In addition, in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 72(b), instead of the process of setting the setting suggesting effect (step C457c), the process of setting the execution reservation of the setting suggesting effect, that is, the predetermined A process of setting a reservation for starting the setting suggestion effect when there is an operation may be performed.

Also, the type (content) of the setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the gaming machine 10 may be one type or a plurality of types.
When there are multiple types of setting suggestion effects, the hole setting screen (screen displayed on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode) is configured to shift to a designation screen for designating the setting suggestion type. It is also possible to Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), when the cursor is positioned on the item "setting suggestion effect" and "ON" is selected for the item, for example, Touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the production button 25
When an operation to touch the center of is performed, a designation screen for designating the type of setting suggestion effect is displayed. It should be noted that the player setting screen (the screen displayed on the display device 41 in the player setting mode) may also be configured to shift to the designation screen for designating the type of setting suggestion effect.

On this designation screen, as shown in FIG. 73(b), for example, the currently selected type is indicated by a cursor that highlights the setting suggesting effect type so as to enclose it. In the example shown in Fig. 2, the cursor is positioned at "suggestion of high day of the week setting".
Here, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG.
Alternatively, it may be the most recent month that does not include the current day), each probability setting value is extracted, the average value of these probability setting values is calculated, and the execution is performed in a manner according to the average value. It is a production that As a result, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the usual probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 .
Alternatively, "monthly average suggestion" means that the average value of the probability setting values of the most recent month including the current day (or the most recent month excluding the current day) was greater than or equal to a predetermined value It may be a production that is executed in the case. As a result, it can be suggested that the game machine 10 usually has a relatively high probability setting value.

Also, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. (It may be the most recent week that does not include . As a result, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the set probability value for this week in the gaming machine 10 .
Alternatively, "one week average suggestion" is the average value of the probability setting values of the last week including the current day (or the last week not including the current day), that is, the average value of the probability setting values of this week is higher than the average value of the set probability values of the last week. This can suggest that the game machine 10 has a higher probability setting value this week than last week.

Also, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG.
Alternatively, it may be the most recent week that does not include the current day), and each probability setting value is extracted and executed if there is a probability setting value that is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold among these probability setting values. It is a performance. That is, it is the same as the above-mentioned "Period Setting Suggestion Effect". As a result, it can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 has set a relatively high probability set value for some time this week.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73(b), the "average day of the week suggestion" is, for example, selected from the setting history (setting history area of the FeRAM 323) on a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day of the week as the current day of the week). Each probability setting value is extracted, the average value of these probability setting values is calculated, and an effect is executed in a mode according to the average value. As a result, it is possible to indicate the tendency of the probability setting value for the predetermined day of the week in the gaming machine 10 .
Alternatively, the “day of the week average suggestion” may be an effect that is executed when the average value of the probability setting values for a predetermined day of the week is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Thus, it can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 has a relatively high set probability value for a given day of the week.

Also, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. is extracted, and there is a probability set value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold among these probability set values. That is, it is the same as the aforementioned "day of the week setting suggestion effect". As a result, it can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 tends to set a relatively high probability setting value on a predetermined day of the week.

In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG.
For example, the day with 3 from the setting history (area for setting history of FeRAM 323) (3 days, 13 days).
23rd) is extracted, the average value of these probability setting values is calculated, and an effect is executed in a mode according to the average value. As a result, it is possible to indicate the tendency of the set probability values for days with 3 in the gaming machine 10 .
Also, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 1
3rd and 23rd) are extracted, and this effect is executed when there is a probability set value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold among these probability set values. As a result, it can be suggested that the game machine 10 tends to set a relatively high probability setting value on days with 3.
It is also possible to suggest an average or high setting for days with numbers other than 3. For example, it is possible to suggest averages or high settings for days with the same number as the current day. In addition, it is possible to select on the hole setting screen or the like which number the day should be.

In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73(b), for example, the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323). and is the effect that is executed when they are the same. As a result, it can be suggested that the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value are the same in the gaming machine 10 .
Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects shown in FIG. 73(b), for example, the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323). , and this is the effect that is executed when these are different. As a result, the gaming machine 10
can suggest that the current probability setting and the previous day's probability setting are different.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. It is an effect that is executed when the difference is two or more stages. As a result, it can be suggested that the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are significantly different in the gaming machine 10 . Furthermore, by selecting "substantial change suggestion" as the type of setting suggestion effect, for example, when the probability setting value of the previous day in the gaming machine 10 is likely to be setting 2, the player can It can be determined that the current probability set value is 4 or more by the appearance of the setting suggestion effect.

When the designation screen shown in FIG. 73(b) can be displayed, instead of the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 70, for example, the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 74 is executed. In this setting-suggestion effect determination process, first, a random number lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the setting-suggestion effect (step C470). Then, if the random number lottery is not won (step C471; N
) ends the setting suggestion effect determination process, and when the random number lottery is won (step C471; Y
) moves to the process of step C463.
Then, the O
If the N/OFF (presence/absence) is OFF (step C464; Y), that is, if the probability setting value setting history is not stored, the probability setting value ( That is, if the current probability set value) is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, set 4), execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C474), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, if the current probability set value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding to execute the setting suggestion effect.

On the other hand, if the setting history record is ON (step C464; N), the FeRAM 323
The content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the area for setting suggestion effect is "one month average suggestion", "
It is determined whether it is one of "1 week average", "suggestion of day average", and "suggestion of daily average with 3" (step C472). And if it is one of "monthly average suggestion", "weekly average", "day of the week average suggestion" and "daily average suggestion with 3" (step C472; Y),
The target probability setting value is extracted from the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323), and if the average value of these is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4), execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (
Step C473), the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the average value of the target probability setting values is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the target probability setting value is set in the most recent month including the current day (or the most recent month excluding the current day) in the case of "monthly average suggestion" It is each probability setting value, and in the case of "one week average suggestion", it is each probability setting value set in the most recent week including the current day (or the most recent week not including the current day) , In the case of "day of the week average suggestion", it is each probability setting value set for a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day as the current day of the week), and in the case of "day average suggestion with 3", the day with 3 ( 3
day, 13th day, and 23rd day).

If none of the "monthly average suggestion", "weekly average suggestion", "day of the week average suggestion", or "daily average suggestion with 3" (step C472; N), (Step C
475). Then, in the case of any one of "one week high setting suggestion", "day high setting suggestion" and "day high setting suggestion with 3" (step C475; Y), the setting history (FeRAM 323
area for setting history), and if there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4) among them, execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C476).
, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, if there is no probability set value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold among the target probability set values, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding to execute the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the target probability setting value is, in the case of "suggestion of high setting for one week", each probability set in the most recent week including the current day (or the most recent week not including the current day) In the case of "day high setting suggestion", it is each probability setting value set for a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day as the current day of the week), and in the case of "day high setting suggestion with 3" , 3 (3rd, 13th, 23rd).

If none of the "suggestion of one week high setting", "suggestion of day high setting", or "suggestion of daily high setting with 3" (step C475; N), it is stored in the FeRAM 323 area for setting suggestion rendering. It is determined whether or not the content of the setting suggestion effect being displayed is "suggestion of deferment" (step C477). If it is "deferment suggestion" (step C477; Y), the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323). Determining execution of setting suggestion effect (step C478),
The setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value are not the same, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding to execute the setting suggestion effect.

Also, if it is not "suggestion of deferment" (step C477; N), it is determined whether the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the area for setting suggestion effect of FeRAM 323 is "change suggestion" (step C479). Then, if it is "change suggestion" (step C479; Y
) extracts the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value from the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323), and if they are not the same, decides to execute the setting suggestion effect (step C480), The setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value are the same, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

If it is not "change suggestion" (step C479; N), that is, the FeRAM 323
If the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the area for the setting suggestion effect is "significant change suggestion", the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting from the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323) Values are extracted, and if the difference between them is equal to or greater than two levels, execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C481), and the setting suggestion effect determination processing is terminated. That is, in this case, when the difference between the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value is not two stages or more, the setting suggestion performance determination processing is terminated without determining the execution of the setting suggestion performance.
Note that setting suggestion effect determination processing (
When the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 74 is performed as step C453), the processes of steps C457a and C457b are omitted.

Also, the setting suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying a setting history calendar at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to make "suggestion of daily high setting", "suggestion of one week high setting", "suggestion of daily high setting with 3", "suggestion of unchanged", "suggestion of change", and "suggestion of significant change" at once. becomes.
If the setting suggestion rendering is a rendering of displaying a setting history calendar, it is preferable that the setting history calendar to be displayed vaguely suggest the probability setting value, as shown in FIG. 75(a), for example. In the example shown in FIG. 75(a), for example, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the days for which any of settings 1 to 3 are set are painted in blue, and any of settings 4 to 6 are set. The days are painted red, and one of them has been changed to purple.
Alternatively, instead of (or in addition to) displaying the setting history calendar as shown in FIG. 75(a) as a setting suggestion effect, the setting history calendar as shown in FIG. It may be displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation during a predetermined period such as during.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. A setting means (game control device 100) for setting one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned, and a memory for storing the probability setting value set by the setting means as a setting history. Means (production control device 300 (FeRAM 323)), and predetermined parameters (for example, day of the week, one week, only the current day, one month, the day with 3, the current day and the previous day) among the probability setting values stored as the setting history ), and executing means (effect control device 300) for executing a suggestive effect (set suggestive effect) regarding the probability set value based on the probability set value corresponding to the probability set value.
By configuring in this way, not only the suggestive effect based on the current probability set value but also the suggestive effect based on the past probability set value can be executed, so that the probability set value can be changed by executing the suggestive effect. It is possible to effectively appeal to the player regarding the probability setting value, such as the fact that the machine is a model or that the probability setting value is normally changed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not to store the setting history by hall staff (for example, among staff members of amusement arcades, a person in charge who possesses setting keys and can perform setting change operations). A first selection means (touch panel 29) for selection by a store clerk, a second selection means (touch panel 29) for hall staff to select whether or not to enable execution of a suggestive effect (setting suggestive effect), (see FIG. 68(b)).
By configuring in this way, whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and whether the suggestive effect to be executed is a effect that suggests only the current probability set value or a effect that also suggests the past probability set value is arbitrarily selected. Since it can be selected by , it is possible to give a degree of freedom to the operation of the hall.
Note that the first selection means and the second selection means may be operating means different from each other.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution means (the effect control device 300) has a predetermined threshold ( For example, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect (setting suggestive effect) according to whether or not there is a probability set value equal to or greater than setting 4) (see FIGS. 70 and 73(b)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold in the past or present probability set values by executing the suggestive effect.

In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed only when there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold among the past or present probability set values, but the present invention is not limited to this. for example,
When there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold in the past or present probability set values, a setting suggesting effect of the first effect mode is executed, and the past or present probability set values are equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold. If there is no probability set value, the setting suggesting effect of the second effect mode different from the first effect mode may be executed.
That is, instead of the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 70, the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 may be executed.

In the setting suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. If there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold among the probability setting values (step C467; Y)
Alternatively, when the current set probability value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value (step C468; Y), execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined (step C469a).
On the other hand, if there is no set probability value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold among the set probability values for the most recent week including the current day (step C466; N), the set threshold value for the same day of the week as the current day of the week. If there is no set probability value equal to or greater than (step C467; N), or if the current set probability value is not equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (step C468; N), execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode is determined. (Step C469b).

Then, for example, when the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 is performed as the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453) in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG.
When the process (step C469a) of determining execution of the setting suggesting effect of the first effect mode is performed, in step C455, the setting suggesting effect of the first effect mode is set instead of the logo display effect.
Also, for example, the setting suggestion effect determination process (
When the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 is performed as step C453), and when the process of determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode (step C469b) is performed, in step C455, A setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode is set instead of the logo display effect.

The same applies to the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG.
That is, in step C473, if the average value of the target probability set values is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the average value of the target probability set values exceeds the predetermined threshold value. If the above is not the case, execution of the setting suggesting effect of the second effect mode may be determined.
Also, in step C474, if the current probability set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and if the current probability set value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value, the second effect is determined. It is also possible to decide to execute the setting suggestion effect of the two effect modes.
Further, in step C476, if there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold among the target probability set values, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the target probability set values If there is no probability set value equal to or greater than the threshold of , execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode may be determined.
Further, in step C478, if the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value are the same, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value are the same. If they are not the same, it may be determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode.
Further, in step C480, if the current set probability value and the set probability value of the previous day are not the same, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the set current probability value and the set probability value of the previous day are the same. In the case of , execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode may be determined.
Further, in step C481, if the difference between the current set probability value and the set probability value of the previous day is two stages or more, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the current set probability value and the set probability value of the previous day are determined. If the difference between the probability set values is not two stages or more, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode may be determined.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution means (effect control device) provides a suggestive effect (setting suggestive effect ) can be executed (see FIG. 73(b)). Figure 73
In the example shown in (b), the suggestion effect corresponding to the average value of the probability setting value is "one month average suggestion",
"Weekly average suggestion", "Day of the week average suggestion", and "Daily average suggestion with 3". The suggestive effect corresponding to the amount of change in the value is "significant change suggestion".
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the probability setting value in the gaming machine 10 by executing the suggestion effect.

<Hall settings, player settings>
The effect control device 300 can set the changeable range determined by the game parlor (hall) for the luminance, volume, etc. of the LEDs and liquid crystals that can be changed by the player through the hall setting mode process (step C10). In addition, the effect control device 300, L based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player by the player setting mode processing (step C11)
ED and LCD brightness, volume, etc. can be changed.

FIG. 77(a) shows an example of the setting of the game machine by the operation of the store clerk of the game parlor. For example, when the effect button 25 is pressed twice while the customer is waiting and the front frame 12 is opened, the hole setting mode is entered, and the hole setting screen shown in FIG. 77(a) is displayed on the display device 41. be done. The contents displayed on the screen are substantially the same as those in FIG. 68(a), but FIG. 77(a) displays an explanation of the operation on the hole setting screen. On the hole setting screen, you can select an item (move the cursor) by touching either the top or bottom of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the effect button 25, and touch the left or right of the touch panel 29. , you can change the current settings.

The currently selected item is indicated by the cursor surrounding the item and highlighting it. In the example shown in FIG. 77(a), the cursor is positioned at the item "volume setting". Touching the left area of the touch panel 29 while the volume setting is selected decreases the volume setting value, and touching the right area of the touch panel 29 increases the volume setting value.
Further, when the lower area of the touch panel 29 is touched while the volume setting is selected, the cursor moves downward and the LED brightness setting item is selected. When the left area of the touch panel 29 is touched while the LED brightness setting item is selected, the LED brightness setting value decreases.
Touching the right area of the touch panel 29 increases the LED brightness setting value. The values and settings of other items can be changed by touching the left and right regions of the touch panel 29 while the cursor is placed thereon. The contents set in this way are stored in the area of each item of the FeRAM 323 .

FIG. 77(b) shows an example of setting of the gaming machine by the operation of the player. For example, when the effect button 25 is pressed during the customer waiting demonstration, the player setting mode is entered, and a player setting screen as shown in FIG. 77(b) is displayed on the display device 41.

In the example shown in FIG. 77(b), the items that can be set on the player setting screen are "volume setting" that enables changing the volume, and "LED brightness" that enables changing the brightness of the LED used for decoration. Settings” item is displayed. In the "volume setting" and "LED brightness setting", the values can be changed within the range of the upper limit set in the hall setting mode. Although not shown in FIG. 77(b), the hole setting screen may display an explanation of the operation on the hole setting screen. On the hole setting screen, it is possible to select an item (move the cursor) by touching either the top or bottom of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the effect button 25, and touch the touch panel 29.
You can change the current settings by touching either the left or right side of the .

The currently selected item is indicated by the cursor surrounding the item and highlighting it. In the example shown in FIG. 77(b), the cursor is positioned at the item "volume setting". Touching the left area of the touch panel 29 while the volume setting is selected decreases the volume setting value, and touching the right area of the touch panel 29 increases the volume setting value.
When the lower area of the touch panel 29 is touched while the volume setting is selected, the cursor moves downward to select the LED brightness setting item. When the left area of the touch panel 29 is touched while the LED brightness setting item is selected, the LED brightness setting value decreases.
Touching the right area of the touch panel 29 increases the LED brightness setting value. The contents set in this way are stored in the area of each item of the FeRAM 323 .

[Hall setting mode processing]
FIG. 78 shows the hole setting mode process (step C10) in the main process described above. In this hole setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the game hall is in a hole setting mode in which information is set (step C501). Note that a hole setting mode flag is set when the hole setting mode is being performed, and it is possible to determine whether the hole setting mode is being performed based on the presence or absence of this flag. If the hole setting mode is in progress (step C501; Y), the process proceeds to step C505.

If the hole setting mode is not in progress (step C501; N), it is determined whether the conditions for starting the hole setting mode are met (step C502). The condition for starting the hole setting mode here is, for example, when the effect button 2 is pressed while the customer is waiting and the front frame 12 is opened.
5 is pressed twice. If the conditions for starting the hole setting mode are not satisfied (step C502; N), the hole setting mode process is terminated. If the condition for starting the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C502; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C503), and the hole setting mode flag is set (step C504).

Next, as processing for selecting an item, it is determined whether there is an upward cursor operation (step C505). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no upward cursor operation (step C505; N), the process proceeds to step C510. If there is an upward cursor operation (step C505; Y), the address of the hole setting item area is prepared (step C506), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C507). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C508), and hole setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C509).

Each item is associated with a value, and the items are arranged in descending order from the top on the hole setting screen shown in FIG. 77(a). Each time the upward cursor is operated, items with smaller corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the hole setting screen. again,
When the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the hole setting screen), if you move the cursor upward, the item with the largest value will be selected and the hole setting screen will appear. to move the cursor to the item displayed at the bottom.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a downward cursor operation (step C510). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no downward cursor operation (step C510; N), the process proceeds to step C516.

If there is a downward cursor operation (step C510; Y), the address of the hole setting item area is prepared (step C511), the upper limit value of the hole setting item is prepared (step C512), and after reaching the upper limit is prepared (step C513). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C514), and hole setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C515).

Each time the downward cursor is operated, items with larger corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the hole setting screen. Also, when the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the hole setting screen), if the cursor is moved downward, the item with the smallest value will be selected and the hole will be displayed. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the setting screen.

After that, hall sound volume adjustment processing (step C516) for setting the changeable range of volume based on operation input, hall LED for setting the changeable range of LED brightness based on operation input
Brightness adjustment processing (step C517) is performed. In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here. Further, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (step C518) for setting the liquid crystal brightness based on the operation input, power saving setting processing (step C519
)I do. In this power saving setting process (step C519), it is set whether or not the power saving setting is enabled when the game is not played for a predetermined time, and the volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness at the time of the power saving setting are set for each hole. can be set to In addition to the above setting, it may be possible to set whether or not to operate the movable accessory during power saving. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input for confirming the information set by these processes (step C520).

If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C520; N), the hole setting mode processing is terminated. Also, if there is a setting confirming operation input (step C520; Y), it is determined whether the confirming operation input was the factory default setting (step C522). For confirmation operation input,
There are a confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processing from steps C516 to C519 and a confirmation operation input for returning to the factory settings, and it is determined which one has been performed.

If the operation input is not the confirmation operation input in the factory settings (step C521; N), that is, if the operation input is confirmation operation for confirming the information set in the processing from steps C516 to C519, the processing from steps C516 to C519 is performed. The information set in step C523 is written as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM (step C523).
. Also, if the operation input is to confirm the factory settings (step C521; Y), the factory settings are processed (step C522), the information set in the processes from steps C516 to C519 is discarded, and the factory settings are reset. The initial value at the time of shipment is used as determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM (step C523). This allows PRO
The initial setting values (set values for volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness) stored in M321 are FeR
Stored in AM323. After that, the screen drawing end of the hole setting mode is set (step C524), the hole setting mode flag is cleared (step C525), and the hole setting mode processing is ended.

[Hall volume adjustment process]
FIG. 79 shows the hall volume adjustment process (step C5) in the hall setting mode process described above.
16) was shown. In this hall volume adjustment process, first, it is determined whether the hall volume adjustment is possible (step C531). The hall volume adjustable state is a state in which the volume adjustment item is selected in the hall setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the hall volume adjustment is not possible (step C531; N), the hall volume adjustment processing is terminated. If the hall volume can be adjusted (step C531; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation to lower the volume (step C532). The operation of lowering the volume is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29 .

If there is no operation to lower the volume (step C532; N), the process proceeds to step C537. If there is an operation to lower the volume (step C532; Y), the address of the hall volume area is prepared (step C533), and the setting value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C534). . Then, minus update processing is performed (step C535),
Volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C536). As a result, the volume is lowered each time there is an operation to lower the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the volume while the volume is at its minimum, the minimum value remains.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to increase the volume (step C537). The operation of increasing the volume is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no operation to increase the volume (step C537; N), the hall volume adjustment process is terminated. If there is an operation to increase the volume (step C537; Y), the address of the hall volume area is prepared (step C
538), prepare the upper limit of the hall sound volume (step C539), and set the value after reaching the upper limit (
Upper limit here) is prepared (step C540). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C541), and volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C5
42). As a result, the volume increases each time there is an operation to increase the volume. Also, even if an operation to increase the volume is performed while the volume is at its maximum, the maximum value remains.

Note that if there is an operation to lower or raise the volume, the operation sound may be output at the changed volume. Also, the volume of each sound to be actually output is set in the sound control process (step C18). There are some sounds that do not follow the hall settings, such as error sounds, so the output settings are made according to the situation.

[Hall LED brightness adjustment process]
FIG. 80 shows the hole LED brightness adjustment process (step C517) in the above-described hole setting mode process. In this hole LED brightness adjustment process, first, it is determined whether the hole LED brightness adjustment is possible (step C551). The hall LED luminance adjustable state is a state in which the LED luminance adjustment item is selected in the hall setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the hole LED brightness adjustment is not possible (step C551; N), the hole LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. Also, if the hall LED brightness is adjustable (
Step C551; Y) determines whether there is an operation to lower the brightness (step C552).
. The operation of lowering the brightness is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29 .

If there is no operation to lower the brightness (step C552; N), the process proceeds to step C557. If there is an operation to lower the luminance (step C552; Y), the address of the hole LED luminance area is prepared (step C553), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C554). ). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C55
5) Set the LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value (step C556).
. As a result, the brightness decreases each time there is an operation to decrease the brightness. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the brightness while the brightness is at its minimum, the brightness remains at the minimum value.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to increase the brightness (step C557). An operation to increase the brightness is an operation to touch the right area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no operation to increase the brightness (step C557; N), the hole LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. If there is an operation to increase the brightness (step C557; Y), the address of the hall LED brightness area is prepared (step C558), the upper limit of the hole LED brightness is prepared (step C559), and after reaching the upper limit is prepared (step C560). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C561), and LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C562). As a result, the brightness increases each time there is an operation to increase the brightness. Also, even if there is an operation to increase the brightness while the brightness is at its maximum, the brightness remains at the maximum value.

Note that if there is an operation to decrease or increase the brightness, the LED may emit light with the changed brightness. Also, the luminance to be actually output is set in the decoration control process (step C19). There are also cases where the brightness does not follow the hole setting value, such as light emission at the time of error, so the output setting is made according to the situation.

[Player Setting Mode Processing]
FIG. 81 shows player setting mode processing (step C11) in the main processing described above. In the player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the player setting mode in which information is set by the player (step C571). It should be noted that when the player setting mode is in effect, a player setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether the player setting mode is on or not based on the presence or absence of this flag. If the player setting mode is in progress (step C5
71; Y) moves to step C575.

If the player setting mode is not in progress (step C571; N), it is determined whether the conditions for starting the player setting mode are satisfied (step C572). Here, the condition for starting the player setting mode is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed once during the customer waiting state.
If the condition for starting the player setting mode is not established (step C572; N), the player setting mode processing is terminated. If the condition for starting the player setting mode is established (step C572; Y), the screen drawing start of the player setting mode is set (step C573).
), and sets the player setting mode flag (step C574).

Next, as processing for selecting an item, it is determined whether there is an upward cursor operation (step C575). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no upward cursor operation (step C575; N), the process proceeds to step C580. If there is an upward cursor operation (step C575; Y), the address of the player setting item area is prepared (step C576), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C577). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C578), and player setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C579).

Each item is associated with a value, and the items are arranged in ascending order from the top on the player setting screen shown in FIG. 77(b). Each time an upward cursor operation is performed, items with smaller corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the player setting screen. again,
When the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the player setting screen), if the upward cursor is operated, the item with the largest value is selected and the player The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the setting screen.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a downward cursor operation (step C580). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no downward cursor operation (step C580; N), the process proceeds to step C586.

If there is a downward cursor operation (step C580; Y), the address of the player setting item area is prepared (step C581), the upper limit value of the player setting item is prepared (step C582), and the upper limit value is set. A set value after arrival is prepared (step C583). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C584), and player setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C585).

Each time the downward cursor is operated, an item with a large corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the player setting screen. Also, when the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the player setting screen), if the downward cursor is operated, the item with the smallest value will be selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the player setting screen.

After that, in the player volume adjustment process (step C586) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C516), and in the hall LED adjustment process (step C517) A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C581) is performed to change the brightness of the LED based on the operation input within the set changeable range. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input for confirming the information set by these processes (step C388).

If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C388; N), the player setting mode processing is terminated. Also, if there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C388; Y), step C
After the information set in 586 and C587 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, the end of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set (step C589), and the player setting mode flag is cleared (step C590). ) to end the player setting mode process. As a result, the brightness and volume of the LED set by the player are changed.

Note that the drawing update setting associated with the operation input after entering the hole setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step C9). In addition, player setting data is stored in RAM3.
22, it may be stored in the FeRAM 323. FIG. Furthermore, when the power is turned off, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 and stored in the FeRAM 322, and when the power is turned on, the power cutoff time is calculated from the time acquired from the RTC 338, and the power cutoff time is calculated.
It may be determined whether or not to store the hole setting value data in the player setting data stored in the eRAM 323 . For example, if the power cut-off time is within a predetermined time, the hall set value data is not stored in the player setting data and is maintained as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short-term power failure or error. , it is possible to prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Player Volume Adjustment Processing]
FIG. 82 shows the player volume adjustment process (step C5) in the player setting mode process described above.
86) was shown. In this player volume adjustment processing, first, it is determined whether or not the player volume adjustment is possible (step C601). The player volume adjustment enabled state is a state in which the volume adjustment item is selected in the player setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the player volume adjustment is not possible (step C601; N), the player volume adjustment process is terminated. If the player's volume can be adjusted (step C601; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation to lower the volume (step C602). The operation of lowering the volume is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29 .

If there is no operation to lower the volume (step C602; N), the process proceeds to step C607. If there is an operation to lower the volume (step C602; Y), the address of the player volume area is prepared (step C603), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C604). ). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C605),
Volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C606). As a result, the volume is lowered each time there is an operation to lower the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the volume while the volume is at its minimum, the minimum value remains.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to increase the volume (step C607). The operation of increasing the volume is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no operation to increase the volume (step C607; N), the player's volume adjustment process is terminated. If there is an operation to increase the volume (step C607; Y), the address of the player volume area is prepared (step C607).
608), prepare the upper limit value of the player sound volume (step C609), and set the value after reaching the upper limit (
Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C610). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C611), and volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C6
12). As a result, the volume increases each time there is an operation to increase the volume. Also, even if an operation to increase the volume is performed while the volume is at its maximum, the maximum value remains.

Note that if there is an operation to lower or raise the volume, the operation sound may be output at the changed volume. Also, the volume of each sound to be actually output is set in the sound control process (step C18). There are also sound volumes that do not conform to player settings, such as error sounds, so output settings are made according to the situation.

[Player LED brightness adjustment process]
FIG. 83 shows the player LED luminance adjustment process (step C587) in the player setting mode process described above. In this player LED brightness adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the player LED brightness adjustment is possible (step C621). The player LED brightness adjustable state is a state in which the LED brightness adjustment item is selected in the player setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the player LED brightness adjustment is not possible (step C621; N), the player LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. Also, if the player LED brightness can be adjusted (
Step C621; Y) determines whether there is an operation to lower the luminance (step C622).
. The operation of lowering the brightness is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29 .

If there is no operation to lower the brightness (step C622; N), the process proceeds to step C627. If there is an operation to lower the brightness (step C622; Y), the address of the player's LED brightness area is prepared (step C623), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C623). C624). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C62
5) Set the LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value (step C626).
. As a result, the brightness decreases each time there is an operation to decrease the brightness. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the brightness while the brightness is at its minimum, the brightness remains at the minimum value.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to increase the brightness (step C627). An operation to increase the brightness is an operation to touch the right area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no operation to increase the brightness (step C627; N), the player's LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. If there is an operation to increase the brightness (step C627; Y), the address of the player LED brightness area is prepared (step C628), the upper limit value of the player LED brightness is prepared (step C629), and the upper limit A setting value (here, the upper limit value) after reaching is prepared (step C630). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C631), and LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C632). As a result, the brightness increases each time there is an operation to increase the brightness. Also, even if there is an operation to increase the brightness while the brightness is at its maximum, the brightness remains at the maximum value.

Note that if there is an operation to decrease or increase the brightness, the LED may emit light with the changed brightness. Also, the luminance to be actually output is set in the decoration control process (step C19). In some cases, such as light emission at the time of an error, the brightness does not follow the player's setting value, and the output setting is performed according to the situation.

[Minus update process]
FIG. 84 shows minus update processing (steps C508 and C535) in the above-described hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing. , C555, C578, C605,
C625) was shown. In this minus update process, first, the contents of the update area are loaded (step C641), the loaded value is updated by -1 (step C642), and the updated value becomes 0.
It is determined whether it is smaller (step C643).

If the updated value is not smaller than 0 (step C643; N), the updated value is saved in the update area (step C645), and the minus update process ends. If the updated value is smaller than 0 (step C643; Y), the set value after reaching the lower limit is set as the updated value (step C644), and the updated value is saved in the update area ( Step C645
), ending the minus update process.

[Plus update process]
FIG. 85 shows plus update processing (steps C514 and C541) in the above-described hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing. , C561, C584, C611, C
631). In this plus update process, first, the contents of the update area are loaded (step C651), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step C652), and it is determined whether the updated value is greater than the upper limit value (step C653). .

If the updated value is not greater than the upper limit value (step C653; N), the updated value is saved in the update area (step C655), and the plus update process ends. If the updated value is greater than the upper limit value (step C653; Y), the set value after reaching the upper limit is set as the updated value (step C654), and the updated value is saved in the update area. (Step C
655), ending the plus update process.

86 to 97 are program lists showing the program structure of part of the game control program executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. FIG. Each program list contains 8
It is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) corresponding to the Z80 bit microprocessor.
It corresponds one-to-one to the machine language instructions (machine code) stored in b (game control program storage means).

Instructions (codes) in each program list are, from left to right, "line numbers" added for convenience, "mnemonics" indicating the operation contents of the instructions (calculation contents), "operands" for the instruction targets, and for convenience of explanation. It is divided into "comments" attached for Unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction), instructions on the program list are basically executed in order of line number (from smallest to largest) from top to bottom of the program list.

FIG. 86 is a program list showing part of the program structure of the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 19). The special figure 1 game process corresponds to the label "P_T1GAME_PRC" and is called in step X112 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

The code at line numbers 1010 and 1020 corresponds to the process of step Y99, line number 1040
to 1080 corresponds to the processing of steps Y100 to Y102, line number 1100
1150 corresponds to the processing of steps Y103 and Y104.

Codes of line numbers 1170 to 1210 correspond to the processing of steps Y105 to Y108. The code of line number 1180 corresponds to the process of step Y105, and loads the head address D_T1GAME of the special figure 1 game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code at line number 1190 corresponds to the processing of step Y106 and loads the value corresponding to the label R_T1SEQCB into the A register. The label R_T1SEQCB is stored in RAM 111c
shows the address for storing the special figure 1 game processing number. The code at line number 1200 corresponds to the process of step Y107 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code at line number 1210 corresponds to the process of step Y108 and calls a subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register storing the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process.

FIG. 87 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21). Special figure 2 game processing corresponds to the label "P_T2GAME_PRC",
Called at step X113 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

The code at line numbers 1310 and 1320 corresponds to the process of step Y130, line number 134
Codes of 0 and 1350 correspond to the processing of steps Y131 and Y132. Also, line number 1
The code from 370 to 1420 corresponds to the processing of steps Y133 and Y134, line number 14
Codes 40 through 1490 correspond to the processing of steps Y135 through Y137.

Codes of line numbers 1510 to 1550 correspond to the processing of steps Y138 to Y140. The code of line number 1520 corresponds to the process of step Y138, and loads the top address D_T2GAME of the special figure 2 game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code at line number 1530 corresponds to the processing of step Y139 and loads the value corresponding to the label R_T2SEQCB into the A register. The label R_T2SEQCB is stored in RAM 111c
shows the address for storing the special figure 2 game processing number. The code at line number 1540 corresponds to the process of step Y140 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code of line number 1550 corresponds to the process of step Y141 and calls a subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register storing the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process.

FIG. 88 is a program listing showing the program structure of part of the fanfare/interval processing (FIG. 42). Fanfare/interval processing is labeled "P_TFAN
”, and is called in steps Y112 and Y145 of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process.

The code at line numbers 1610 and 1620 corresponds to the process of step Y939, line number 164
Codes at 0 and 1650 correspond to the process of step Y940, and codes at line numbers 1670 and 1680 correspond to the process of step Y941.

The code of line numbers 1700 to 1750 corresponds to the processing of steps Y942 to Y946. The code of line number 1710 corresponds to the process of step Y942, and loads the top address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit table into the HL register. line number 172
A code of 0 corresponds to the processing of step Y943, where the value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG is loaded into the A register. Label R_ROUND_FLG is stored in RAM 11
1c indicates an address for storing round number upper limit information. The code at line number 1730 corresponds to the process of step Y944 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code of line number 1740 corresponds to the process of step Y945, storing the value of the L register in the area of RAM 111c indicated by label R_ROUND_MAX. Label R_ROU
ND_MAX indicates the top address of the round number upper limit area in the RAM 111c.
The code at line number 1750 corresponds to the processing of step Y946, and stores the value of the H register as the label R
Store in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by _ROUND_PNT. Label R_ROUN
D_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c. Codes of line numbers 1770 to 1790 correspond to the processing of steps Y947 to Y949, and codes of line numbers 1810 and 1820 correspond to the processing of step Y950.

FIG. 89 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the general-purpose game processing (FIG. 50). Normal game processing corresponds to the label "P_FGAME", and timer interrupt processing (Fig. 1
1) is called in step X114.

The code of line numbers 1910 and 1920 corresponds to the processing of steps B1 and B2, line number 19
Codes from 40 to 1980 correspond to the processing of steps B3 and B4. Also, line number 200
Codes from 0 to 2040 correspond to the processing of steps B5 to B7. The code of line number 2010 corresponds to the processing of step B5, and loads the head address D_FGAME of the general-purpose game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code at line number 2020 corresponds to the processing of step B6 and loads the value corresponding to the label R_FSEQCB into the A register. A label R_FSEQCB indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing a general-purpose game processing number.

The code at line number 2030 corresponds to the processing of step B7, labeled P_GET_WORD
Calls the corresponding 2-byte data acquisition process. The code at line number 2040 is step B8
, and calls a subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is stored.

FIG. 90 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the process during normal map display (FIG. 51). The normal map displaying process corresponds to the label "P_FDISP" and is called at step B11 of the normal map game process.

Codes of line numbers 2110 and 2120 correspond to the processing of steps B501 and B502, and codes of line numbers 2140 and 2150 correspond to the processing of step B503. Also, line number 2
Codes 170 through 2270 correspond to the processing of steps B504 through B512. The code of line number 2180 corresponds to the processing of step B504, and loads the start address D_FOPEN_PNT of the intermediate processing setting table into the HL register. The code at line number 2190 corresponds to the processing of step B505 and loads the value corresponding to the label R_FZ_INF into the A register. A label R_FZ_INF indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing normal pattern stop symbol information. The code at line number 2200 corresponds to the processing of step B506,
Call the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code of line number 2210 corresponds to the processing of step B507, storing the value of the L register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_FTBL_CTL. Label R_FTBL
_CTL indicates the start address of the normal control pointer area in the RAM 111c. The code of line number 2220 corresponds to the processing of step B508, and stores the value of the H register in the area of the address next to the top address of the normal control pointer area indicated by the label R_FTBL_CTL.

The code of line number 2240 corresponds to the process of step Y509, loads the start address D_FOPEN_TIM of the electric open time table into the HL register, and the code of line number 2250 corresponds to the predetermined value of step Y510, and the numerical value corresponding to the label R_FZ_INF. into the A register. A label R_FZ_INF indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing normal pattern stop symbol information. The code at line number 2260 corresponds to the process of step Y511 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code of line number 2270 corresponds to the process of step Y512, and the value of the HL register, which stores the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process, is transferred to the address next to the top address of the normal game process timer area indicated by the label R_FSEQCB. area.

FIG. 91 is a program list showing the program structure of the 2-byte data acquisition process (FIG. 52). The 2-byte data acquisition process corresponds to the label "P_GET_WORD",
Steps Y107, Y140, Y944, B7, B506, B511 of game processing, special figure 2 game processing, fanfare/interval processing, normal map game processing and normal map displaying process
is called in

The code at line number 2310 corresponds to the processing of step Y971 and doubles the value of the A register. The calculated value is stored in the WA register. The code at line number 2320 is step Y97
Corresponding to the processing of 2, the value of the WA register is added to the address stored in the HL register. The code of line number 2340 corresponds to the processing of step Y973, and loads the value stored in the address corresponding to the value of the HL register and the address obtained by adding 1 to the HL register. Then, at line number 2360, it returns to the calling process.

That is, there are two arguments to the 2-byte data acquisition process, which are stored in the same registers (here, the A register and the HL register) regardless of which process calls it.
Also, there is only one return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process, and regardless of which process it is called from, the return value is put in the same register (here, the HL register) and returned to the original process. ing.

FIG. 92 is a program list showing part of the program structure of the symbol variation control process (FIG. 53). The symbol variation control process corresponds to the label "P_ZGR_CTL" and is called in steps Y117, Y154 and B16 of the special figure 1 game process, the special figure 2 game process and the general figure game process.

The code of line numbers 2430 to 2460 corresponds to the processing of steps Y1401 to Y1403. Also, the code of line numbers 2480 and 2490 corresponds to the process of step Y1404. At line number 2480, the value of the HL register is updated by +1 to be the address of the symbol display table (variable) corresponding to the target symbol, and at line number 2490, the address stored in the HL register and the address are incremented by 1. Load the value of the address into the HL register. As a result, the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the target symbol is obtained.

Codes of line numbers 2510 to 2530 correspond to the processing of steps Y1405 and Y1406. The code of line number 2510 corresponds to the processing of step Y1405, updates the value of the DE register by -1 and sets it as the address of the target flashing control timer area, and the code of line number 2520 corresponds to the processing of step Y1406, label Call the 1-byte subtraction operation corresponding to P_DEC_BYTE. The code of line number 2530 corresponds to the processing of step Y1407.

The code of line number 2550 corresponds to the process of step Y1408, and saves the blink control timer initial value (value corresponding to label C_ZGR_TIM) in the area (blink control timer area) corresponding to the address stored in the DE register. The code of line number 2570 corresponds to the process of step Y1409, and updates the value of the DE register by -1 to make it the address of the target variable pattern number area. The code of line number 2580 corresponds to the processing of step Y1410, and loads the fluctuation pattern number upper limit judgment value (the numerical value corresponding to the label C_ZGR_MAX) into the B register. The code at line number 2590 corresponds to the process of step Y1411, label P_INC
Call the 1-byte addition process corresponding to _BYTE.

FIG. 93 is a program list showing the program structure of the 1-byte subtraction process (FIG. 54). 1 byte subtraction processing corresponds to the label "P_DEC_BYTE", special figure 1 game processing,
Called at step Y1406 of the symbol variation control process called at steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 2 game process and the general figure game process, respectively.

The code of line numbers 2710 and 2720 corresponds to the processing of step Y1421. line number 2
At 710, the A register is loaded with the value at the address stored in the DE register. D.
The E register stores the address of the target flashing control timer area. line number 2720
Then, if the value of the A register is 0, the process returns to the caller.

The code at line numbers 2730 and 2740 corresponds to the process of step Y1422, line number 27
At 30, the value of the A register is updated by -1, and at line number 2740, the value of the A register is saved in the area of the address stored in the DE register. As a result, the value of the target blinking control timer area is updated by -1.

FIG. 94 is a program list showing the program structure of the 1-byte addition process (FIG. 55). 1 byte addition processing corresponds to the label "P_INC_BYTE", special figure 1 game processing,
It is called at step Y1411 of the symbol variation control process called at steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 2 game process and the normal figure game process, respectively.

The code of line number 2810 corresponds to the process of step Y1431 and loads the value of the address stored in the DE register into the A register. The address of the target variable pattern number area is stored in the DE register. The code of line number 2820 corresponds to the processing of step Y1432 and updates the value of the A register by -1.

The code of line numbers 2830 to 2860 corresponds to the processing of steps Y1433 and Y1434. At line number 2830, the value of the A register and the value of the B register are compared. The B register stores a variable symbol number upper limit determination value. At line number 2840, if the value of the A register is not the upper limit value, the processing from line number 2880 onwards is performed. If the value of the A register is the upper limit, the code of line number 2860 is executed. The code of line number 2860 corresponds to the processing of step Y1434, and clears the value of the A register to 0 by taking the exclusive OR of the values of the A register.

The code of line numbers 2880 and 2890 corresponds to the processing of step Y1435 and saves the value of the A register to the address area stored in the DE register. As a result, the value of the target variable pattern number area is updated.

FIG. 95 is a program list showing the program structure of the effect command setting process (FIG. 56). The effect command setting process corresponds to the label "P_SBCOM_SET" and is called in each process executed during the timer interrupt process.

The code at line number 3010 corresponds to the processing of step X601, and loads the value from port C_TXSTS0, which stores the status of the effect serial transmission buffer, into the A register. The code of line numbers 3020 to 3040 corresponds to the processing of step X602. At line number 3020, the value of the A register is ANDed with 3FH, and at line number 3030, the value of the A register is compared with 20H. Then, at line number 3040, if the operation result at line number 3030 is zero (Z) (that is, if the transmission buffer is full), return to the instruction at line number 3010,
If the operation result of line number 3030 is not zero (Z) (that is, if the transmission buffer is not full), the instructions after line number 3060 are executed.

The code at line numbers 3060 and 3070 corresponds to the processing of step X603. line number 30
At 60, the value in the B register is loaded into the A register. Command data (
MODE) is stored. At line number 3070, the command data (MODE) stored in the A register is stored in C_TXBUF0 (serial transmission buffer 0).

The code at line number 3100 corresponds to the processing of step X604, and loads the value from port C_TXSTS0, which stores the status of the effect serial transmission buffer, into the A register. The code from line number 3110 to 3130 corresponds to the processing of step X605. At line number 3110, the value of the A register is ANDed with 3FH, and at line number 3120, the value of the A register is compared with 20H. Then, at line number 3130, if the operation result at line number 3120 is zero (Z) (that is, if the transmission buffer is full), return to the instruction at line number 3100,
If the operation result of line number 3120 is not zero (Z) (that is, if the transmission buffer is not full), the instructions after line number 3150 are executed.

The code at line numbers 3150 and 3160 corresponds to the processing of step X606. line number 31
At 50, the value in the B register is loaded into the A register. Command data (
ACTION) is stored. At line number 3160, the command data (ACTION) stored in the A register is stored in C_TXBUF0 (serial transmission buffer 0).
Line number 3180 returns to the calling process.

FIG. 96 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the processing during special figure 1 display (FIG. 57) cited as a modified example. The special figure 1 displaying process corresponds to the label "P_T1DISP" and is called at step Y111 of the special figure 1 game process.

Codes of line numbers 3210 and 3220 correspond to the processing of steps Y751 and Y752.
At line number 3210, the value of the A register is cleared to 0 by exclusive-ORing the values of the A register. At line number 3220, by exchanging the value of the A register and the jackpot flag 1 area (value corresponding to R_T1HIT_FLG), the jackpot flag 1 is loaded into the A register and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared.

The code of line numbers 3240 and 3250 corresponds to the process of step Y753. line number 32
40 compares the value of the A register and the big hit judgment value (value of C_THIT_FLG), and at line number 3250, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (does not match the big hit judgment value), P_T1D
It shifts to the process corresponding to ISP_10.

The code at line numbers 3280 and 3290 corresponds to the processing of step Y754 and sets the test signal. The code of line numbers 3310 to 3350 corresponds to the processing of steps Y942 to Y946. This processing is the same as row numbers 1710 to 1750 in FIG.

The code of line number 3310 corresponds to the process of step Y942, and loads the top address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit table into the HL register. line number 3320
corresponds to the processing of step Y943, and loads the value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG into the A register. The label R_ROUND_FLG is stored in the RAM 111
c indicates an address for storing round number upper limit information. The code at line number 3330 corresponds to the process of step Y944 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code at line number 3340 corresponds to the process of step Y945, storing the value of the L register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. Label R_ROU
ND_MAX indicates the top address of the round number upper limit area in the RAM 111c.
The code of line number 3350 corresponds to the processing of step Y946, and stores the value of the H register as the label R
Store in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by _ROUND_PNT. Label R_ROUN
D_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c.

FIG. 97 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of special figure 2 displaying process (FIG. 58) mentioned as a modified example. The special figure 2 displaying process corresponds to the label "P_T2DISP" and is called at step Y144 of the special figure 2 game process.

The code of line numbers 3410 and 3420 corresponds to the process of steps Y813 and Y814, and the code of line numbers 3440 and 3450 corresponds to the process of step Y815. . The code at line numbers 3480 and 3490 is step Y8
16, and the code of line numbers 3510 to 3550 corresponds to steps Y942 to Y9.
46 processing.

The code of line number 3510 corresponds to the process of step Y942, and loads the top address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit table into the HL register. line number 3520
corresponds to the processing of step Y943, and loads the value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG into the A register. The label R_ROUND_FLG is stored in the RAM 111
c indicates an address for storing round number upper limit information. The code at line number 3530 corresponds to the process of step Y944 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code of line number 3540 corresponds to the process of step Y945, storing the value of the L register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. Label R_ROU
ND_MAX indicates the top address of the round number upper limit area in the RAM 111c.
The code of line number 3550 corresponds to the processing of step Y946, and stores the value of the H register as the label R
Store in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by _ROUND_PNT. Label R_ROUN
D_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c.

98 to 108 show a register structure for the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 and a program list showing a part of the game control program executed by the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300. FIG. Each program list is a list of instructions in the assembly language (source code) corresponding to the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, except for pseudo-instructions (instructions for the assembler), etc., stored in the PROM 321 (game control program storage means). There is a one-to-one correspondence with machine language instructions (machine code).

FIG. 98 shows the structure of the register for the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.
The CPU 311 is provided with eight 32-bit size registers ER0 to ER7. Each of these registers can also be used as 16-bit size or 8-bit size registers. For example, ER0 is 16-bit size E0 and R0 (R0H+R0L)
, and can also be used as 8-bit size R0L and R0H.

ER0 to ER7, E0 to E7, R0 to R7, R0H to R07 and R0L to R
Each code of 7L constitutes a code attached to identify each of a plurality of registers. In the following explanation, these codes are referred to as register addresses for the sake of convenience, and the register whose numeric part is 0 is the first address register, and the address value increases in the order in which the value of the numeric part increases. . Of course, the manner and order of marking are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the order may be determined in alphabetical order, or the order or address of each register may be determined separately from the numerical or alphabetical order of the attached codes.

FIG. 99 is a program listing showing the program structure of part of the hole setting mode process (FIG. 78). The hall setting mode processing corresponds to the label "_p_hall_menu" and the main processing (
It is called at step C10 in FIG. 63).

The code of line numbers 5000 to 5020 corresponds to the processing of steps C506 to C508. The code at line number 5000 corresponds to step C506 and sets the address of the hole setting item area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code of line number 5010 corresponds to step C507, and sets 9 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 5020 corresponds to step C508, labeled "_p_downcount"
Call the minus update process corresponding to . Note that the return value from this minus update process is R
The data is returned in the 0L register, and the value of the R0L register is used in the subsequent processing corresponding to step C509.

Codes of line numbers 5100 to 5130 correspond to the processing of steps C511 to C514. The code at line number 5100 corresponds to step C511 and sets the address of the hole setting item area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code at line number 5110 corresponds to step C512 and sets 9 as the upper limit value of the hall setting item in the R1L register in an 8-bit size. The code of line number 5120 corresponds to step C513, and sets 0 in the R1H register in an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 5130 corresponds to step C514 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". Note that the return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to step C515 that follows, the value of the R0L register is used.

FIG. 100 is a program list showing the program structure of part of the hall sound volume adjustment process (FIG. 79). The hall volume adjustment process corresponds to the label "_p_hall_sndvol" and is called at step C516 in the hall setting mode process (FIG. 78).

The code of line numbers 5500 to 5520 corresponds to the processing of steps C533 to C535. The code at line number 5500 corresponds to step C533 and sets the address of the hall volume area in 32-bit size to the ER0 register. The code at line number 5510 is step C5
34, 0 is set in the R1L register in 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 5520 corresponds to step C535 and calls the minus update process corresponding to the label "_p_downcount". Note that the return value from this minus update process is R0L
The value of the R0L register is used in the subsequent processing corresponding to step C536.

The code from line number 5600 to 5630 corresponds to the processing of steps C538 to C541. The code at line number 5600 corresponds to step C538 and sets the address of the hall volume area in 32-bit size to the ER0 register. The code at line number 5610 is step C5
39, 9 is set in the R1L register in 8-bit size as the upper limit value of the hall sound volume. The code at line number 5620 corresponds to step C540, and the set value after reaching the upper limit is 9
is set in the R1H register with an 8-bit size. The code at line number 5630 is step C5
41 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". Note that the return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to step C542 that follows, the value of the R0L register is used.

FIG. 101 is a program list showing the program structure of part of the hole LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 80). Hall LED brightness adjustment processing corresponds to the label "_p_hall_ledvol",
Called at step C517 in the hole setting mode process (FIG. 78).

The code of line numbers 5700 to 5720 corresponds to the processing of steps C553 to C555. The code at line number 5700 corresponds to step C553 and sets the address of the Hall LED luminance area in 32-bit size to the ER0 register. The code at line number 5710 corresponds to step C554, and sets 0 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 5720 corresponds to step C555, labeled "_p_downcount
” is called. Note that the return value from this minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to step C556 that follows, the value in the R0L register is used.

The code of line numbers 5800 to 5830 corresponds to the processing of steps C558 to C561. The code at line number 5800 corresponds to step C558 and sets the address of the Hall LED luminance area in 32-bit size to the ER0 register. The code at line number 5810 corresponds to step C599, which sets 9 in the R1L register in 8-bit size as the upper limit value of the hall LED brightness. The code at line number 5820 corresponds to step C560, and sets 9 in the R1H register in an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 5830 corresponds to step C561 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". Note that the return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to step C562 that follows, the value of the R0L register is used.

FIG. 102 is a program list showing the program structure of part of the player setting mode process (FIG. 81). The player setting mode process corresponds to the label "_p_player_menu" and is called at step C11 in the main process (FIG. 63).

The code from line number 6000 to 6020 corresponds to the processing of steps C576 to C578. The code at line number 6000 corresponds to step C576 and sets the address of the player setting item area in 32-bit size in the ER0 register. The code of line number 6010 corresponds to step C577, and sets 2 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 6020 corresponds to step C578, labeled "_p_downcount"
Call the minus update process corresponding to . Note that the return value from this minus update process is R
The value of the R0L register is used in the subsequent processing corresponding to step C579.

Codes of line numbers 6100 to 6130 correspond to the processing of steps C581 to C584. The code at line number 6100 corresponds to step C581 and sets the address of the player setting item area in 32-bit size in the ER0 register. The code at line number 6110 corresponds to step C582 and sets 2 in the R1L register in 8-bit size as the upper limit value of the player setting item. The code of line number 6120 corresponds to step C583, and sets 0 in the R1H register with an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 6130 corresponds to step C584 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". Note that the return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to step C585 that follows, the value of the R0L register is used.

FIG. 103 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82). The player volume adjustment process corresponds to the label "_p_player_sndvol" and is called at step C586 in the player setting mode process (FIG. 81).

Codes of line numbers 6200 to 6220 correspond to the processing of steps C603 to C605. The code at line number 6200 corresponds to step C603 and sets the address of the player volume area in 32-bit size to the ER0 register. The code at line number 6210 is step C6
04, 0 is set in the R1L register in 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 6220 corresponds to step C605 and calls the minus update process corresponding to the label "_p_downcount". Note that the return value from this minus update process is R0L
The value of the R0L register is used in the subsequent processing corresponding to step C606.

The code of line numbers 6300 to 6330 corresponds to the processing of steps C608 to C611. The code at line number 6300 corresponds to step C608 and sets the address of the player volume area in 32-bit size to the ER0 register. The code at line number 6310 is step C6
Corresponding to 09, 9 is set in the R1L register in 8-bit size as the upper limit value of the player sound volume. The code at line number 6320 corresponds to step C610, and the set value after reaching the upper limit is 9
is set in the R1H register with an 8-bit size. The code at line number 6330 is step C6
11 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". Note that the return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to step C612 that follows, the value of the R0L register is used.

FIG. 104 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the player's LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83). The player LED brightness adjustment process corresponds to the label "_p_player_ledvol" and is called at step C587 in the player setting mode process (FIG. 81).

The code of line numbers 6400 to 6420 corresponds to the processing of steps C623 to C625. The code at line number 6400 corresponds to step C623 and sets the address of the player LED brightness area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code at line number 6410 corresponds to step C624, and sets 0 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 6420 corresponds to step C625 and is labeled "_p_downcount
” is called. Note that the return value from this minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to step C626 that follows, the value in the R0L register is used.

The code from line number 6500 to 6530 corresponds to the processing of steps C628 to C631. The code at line number 6500 corresponds to step C628 and sets the address of the player LED luminance area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code at line number 6510 corresponds to step C629 and sets 9 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as the upper limit of player LED brightness. The code at line number 6520 corresponds to step C630, and sets 9 in the R1H register in an 8-bit size as a set value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 6530 corresponds to step C631 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". Note that the return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C632, the value of the R0L register is used.

FIG. 105 is a program list showing the program structure of the minus update process (FIG. 84). The minus update process corresponds to the label "_p_downcount", and the above-mentioned hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing are performed as minus Update processing (step C508
, C535, C555, C578, C605, C625).

The code at line numbers 7000 and 7010 corresponds to step C641. At line number 7000, the value of the ER2 register is saved to the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register.
Load a value into a register. This loads the R2L register with the value corresponding to the currently selected item. The code at line number 7020 corresponds to step C642 and R2L
Update the register value by -1.

Codes of line numbers 7030 to 7040 correspond to the processing of steps C643 and C644. At line number 7030, if the value of the R2L register after updating is 0 or more, that is, if it is within the range of values corresponding to the item, then the processing from line number 7050 onwards corresponding to label L1234 is performed. The code at line number 7040 corresponds to the processing of step C644, and if the determination result at line number 7030 is less than 0, that is, if it is outside the range of values corresponding to the item, the set value after reaching the lower limit is stored. Stores the value of the R1L register that has been received in the R2L register.

The code from line number 7050 to 7070 corresponds to the processing of step C645, line number 70
At 60, the value corresponding to the updated item stored in the R2L register is stored in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register. At line number 7070, the value of the R2L register is stored in the R0L register. After that, at line number 7080, the saved information of ER2 is restored and the processing of the caller is returned to.

FIG. 106 is a program list showing the program structure of the plus update process (FIG. 85). The plus update process corresponds to the label "_p_upcount", and is the plus in the above-described hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing. Update processing (steps C514, C54
1, C561, C584, C611, C631).

The code at line numbers 7100 and 7110 corresponds to step C651. At line number 7100, the value of the ER2 register is saved to the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register.
Load a value into a register. This loads the R2L register with the value corresponding to the currently selected item. The code at line number 7120 corresponds to step C652 and R2L
Update the register value by +1.

Codes of line numbers 7130 to 7150 correspond to the processing of steps C653 and C654. At line number 7130, the value of the R1L register storing the upper limit value is compared with the value of the R2L register. At line number 7140, if the comparison result is within the range of values corresponding to the item, label L234
Processing after line number 7160 corresponding to 5 is performed. The code at line number 7150 is step C6
54, when the comparison result at line number 7140 is out of the range of values corresponding to the item, the value of the R1H register storing the set value after reaching the upper limit is stored in the R2L register.

The code from line number 7160 to 7180 corresponds to the process of step C655, line number 71
At 70, the value corresponding to the updated item stored in the R2L register is stored in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register. At line number 7180, the value of the R2L register is stored in the R0L register. After that, at line number 7190, the saved ER2 information is restored, and the processing of the caller is returned to.

FIG. 107 is a program list showing the program structure of part of random number processing. The random number processing corresponds to the label "_rand", and the random number update processing in the above main processing (step C12)
, and is a process for generating random numbers.

Line number 7200 loads the ER0 register with a value from the random seed area "_r_rand_seed" and line number 7210 loads the ER1 register with the value of 41C64E6D in hexadecimal. At line number 7230, the value in the ER1 register is multiplied by the value in the ER0 register and the result is stored in the ER0 register.

After that, various operations are performed, the value of the ER1 register is subtracted from the value of the ER1 register at line number 7260 and stored in the ER1 register, and the value of hexadecimal 80 is stored in the R1H register at line number 7270, Line number 7280 calls the range correction process corresponding to the label "_hosei". At line number 7290, the value of the R1 register storing the return value from the range correction process is stored in the R0 register, and at line number 7300, the process returns to the calling random number update process.

FIG. 108 is a program list showing the program structure of part of range correction processing. The range correction process corresponds to the label "_hosei", is called in the random number processing described above, and is a process for correcting the range of random numbers.

At line number 7400, the value of the ER2 register is saved in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register, and at line number 7410, the value of the ER0 register is loaded into the ER2 register. At line number 7420, the value of the ER0 register is divided by the value of the ER1 register, and the quotient is ER
0 register.

After that, various operations are performed, and at line number 7450 the value of the ER1 register is subtracted from the value of the ER2 register and the result is stored in the ER2 register, and at line number 7460 the value of the ER2 register is stored in the ER1 register. As a result, the operation result of the ER2 register is stored in the ER1 register as a return value. Line number 7470 returns to the caller's random number processing.

The control processes performed by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 described above include those in which one control process is called in response to a call command executed in another control process. there is FIG. 109 shows an example of such control processing relationships. In this relationship, when one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed by another control process, the one control process is in a lower group than the other control process. set the group to belong to Also, in the case of control processing with multiple callers,
It belongs to the lower group than the lowest group among the groups to which the control process mentioned as the caller belongs.

In the relationship shown in FIG. 109(a), a first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the first control process is different from the first and second control processes. different third
It is possible to call a control process. Then, it is possible to call a fourth control process in which the second control process and the third control process are different from the first to third control processes. Note that the first control process may call a fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, or the fifth control process may call the fourth control process. Also good. Also, the first control process may be able to directly call the fourth control process.

In this relationship, the first control process belongs to the first group, and the second, third, and fifth control processes called by this first control process belong to the second group. A fourth control process called by a control process belonging to the second group belongs to the third group.

In the processing in the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is the second control processing, the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20, 21 ) as the third control process, the 2-byte data acquisition process (FIG. 52) as the fourth control process, and the general map game process (
50) can be associated with the fifth control process.

In addition, in the processing of the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is the second control processing, the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 20, Figure 21
) can be associated with the third control process, and the fanfare/interval process (FIG. 42) can be associated with the fourth control process.

In addition, in the processing of the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is the second control processing, the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 20, Figure 21
) as the third control process, the pattern variation control process (FIG. 53) as the fourth control process, and the general pattern game process (
50) can be associated with the fifth control process. Note that 1-byte subtraction processing (Fig. 54)
and the 1-byte addition process (FIG. 55) as a sixth control process different from the first to fifth control processes,
It can also be said that the fourth control process can call the sixth control process.

It is also possible to associate the effect command setting process (FIG. 56), which may be called from a plurality of control processes, as the fourth control process. For example, timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11)
is the first control process, the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 19) is the second control process, the special figure 2 game process (
20 and 21) are associated with the third control process, and the normal game process (FIG. 50) is associated with the fifth control process, and each of these second, third, and fifth control processes calls a control process (for example, , special figure 1
Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing, normal figure normal processing) are respectively referred to as the 6th to 8th control processing (not shown), and the production command setting processing (FIG. 56) called from the 6th to 8th control processing is the 4th It is possible to associate them as control processing.

In the processing in the production control device 300, the hall setting mode processing (Fig. 78) is the first control processing, the hall volume adjustment processing (Fig. 79) is the second control processing, and the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (Fig. 80
) as the third control process, and the minus update process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85) as the fourth control process.
In the control process, the liquid crystal luminance adjustment process (step C518) can be associated with the fifth control process.

In addition, in the processing of the effect control device 300, the player setting mode processing (FIG. 81) is the first control processing, the player volume adjustment processing (FIG. 82) is the second control processing, the player LED brightness adjustment processing (
83) as the third control process, minus update process (FIG. 84) and plus update process (FIG. 85)
can be associated with the fourth control process.

In the process of the game control device 100, regardless of the relationship described above, registers for storing arguments and return values are specified. As a register for storing arguments, for example, line number 11 in FIG.
80 and 1190, the A register and the HL register are mainly used. For example, the HL register is mainly used as a register for storing return values, as shown in line number 2340 of FIG. That is, registers for storing arguments and return values are determined for each control process regardless of the group to which the control process belongs.

The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 does not have so many registers that can be used, and sets the registers to be used regardless of the group, so as to efficiently use the limited registers. Also, if the registers to be used are determined for each group, processing for moving values between registers is required when storing return values. However, since the capacity of the ROM 111B is limited in the game control device 100, the same register is used regardless of the group to eliminate the process of moving values between registers, thereby reducing the program capacity.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, groups basically set as described above are associated with registers used for control processing of each group. Also, in this embodiment, the order of groups and the order of registers correspond to each other. The order of the groups is such that the first group is the highest, the second group, the third group, and so on are ranked lower. The order of the registers is that the R0 register is the highest, the R1 register, the R2 register, and so on.
The order of rank is lower. Note that the R0 register may correspond to the leading address of the registers, or may not correspond to the leading address. The order of addresses in each register may or may not correspond to the rank.

For example, the control processing belonging to the third group mainly uses the R2 register, and the control processing belonging to the second group, which is the higher group of the third group, mainly uses the R register higher than the R2 register.
1 register is used. In addition, the first group, which is the upper group of the second group
Control processing belonging to a group mainly uses the R0 register above the R1 register.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109(b), as a register for storing a return value to the caller's control process, a register corresponding to the caller's group is used. for example,
In the random number process (FIG. 107) called by the random number update process (step C12) and the range correction process (FIG. 108) called by the random number process, the random number update process belongs to the first group and the random number process belongs to the second group. , range correction processing belong to the third group. In this relationship
In the range correction processing belonging to the third group, processing is mainly performed using the R2 register, and finally the R2 register is used.
The return value is moved from the 2 register to the R1 register (line number 7460). again,
In the random number processing belonging to the second group, processing is mainly performed using the R1 register, and finally the return value is transferred from the R1 register to the R0 register (line number 7290).

In principle, in the control processing belonging to the third group, the return value is stored in the R1 register.
The return value is stored in the R0 register as shown in 9(c). This is because the minus update process and the plus update process are also called from the control process belonging to the first group. In such a case, the return value is stored in the register used by the highest group among the groups to which the caller's control process belongs. Therefore, in the minus update process and the plus update process, the return value is stored in the R0 register used by the control process belonging to the first group.

Correspondingly, in the hole setting mode processing shown in FIG. 99 and the player setting mode processing shown in FIG. The argument is stored in the R1 register, which is the register used by the process belonging to the second group. That is, the argument is stored in the register used by the group one level higher than the group to which the called process belongs.

In the effect control device 300, since the register of the CPU 311 and the capacity of the PROM 321 have margins, it is possible to predetermine the register to be used in this way. By predetermining the registers to be used for each group to which the control process belongs in this way, the registers to be used in the control process are automatically determined when developing each control process, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, since the current hierarchy can be known by looking at the address of the return value during development, it is easy to understand when looking back at the program later or when someone else sees it, and the efficiency of development can be improved. Also, for example, if the return value register and the register used for processing match, it may be necessary to temporarily store the return value in RAM. , there is no need to perform such processing.

In addition, although the registers of the same order as the order of the group are used, the lower the group, the lower the register may be used, and the order does not necessarily have to be the same. In other words, if the hierarchy of control processing is deep (the order of the group is low), there is a high possibility that the register near the top (higher order register) is used, so do not use the register near the top for the return value. do it. The higher the hierarchy, the more empty the top register becomes, so it can be used. In other words, the deeper the hierarchy of control processing (the lower the order of the group), the farther the register from the start address (lower-order register) is used for the return value, and the shallower the control processing hierarchy, the closer the register to the start address. It's fine if you use it.

Also, the criteria for grouping are not limited to those based on the relationship of call instructions and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the control process included in the special figure 1 game process is the first group, the control process included in the special figure 2 game process is the second group, and the control process included in the general figure game process is the third
Good as a group. Further, grouping may be performed among these first to third groups. Then, the groups divided in this way may be associated with the registers to be used.

Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 109(c), for control processes called from a plurality of groups with different orders, the register for storing the return value is set according to the group of the caller control process. can be For example, regarding the negative update process and the positive update process, if the caller is the hole setting mode process or the player setting mode process belonging to the first group, the return value is stored in the R0 register, and the caller is the second group. , the return value may be stored in the R1 register.

Also, regardless of the group to which the control process belongs, the registers closest to the top may be preferentially used for the return value. For example, as shown in FIG. 109(d), when there is one return value, the return value is stored in the R0 register, and when there are two return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register and the R1 register is Store the second return value in . When there are three return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register, the second return value is stored in the R1 register, and the third return value is stored in the R2 register.

When there are a plurality of return values, even if each return value is small enough to fit in the same group (same hierarchy) register, the return values are stored in different group (hierarchy) registers as described above. For example, even if two return values are assigned to R0L and R0H with a size of 1 byte each, the first is stored in R0L and the second is stored in R1L.

If there are four or more return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register, the second return value is stored in the R1 register, and the third return value is stored in the R2 register. Furthermore, the fourth and subsequent return values are stored in the RAM 322 . The number of return values to start using the RAM 322 for storing return values is not limited to 4 and can be set to any number. Alternatively, if the return value is 8 or more, it may be stored in the RAM 322 . Also, a stack area may be used instead of or in combination with the RAM 322 .

Since there is a limit to the types of registers, when the number of groups increases (hierarchy deepens), it may be difficult to decide which registers to use for each group. can be avoided. Furthermore, by using other areas such as the RAM 322, it is possible to handle any number of return values.

Arguments can also be used in the same order of register usage as the return value, and when there are multiple arguments, the registers closest to the top are preferentially used in the same manner as above.
For example, in the processes shown in FIGS. 99 to 104, the arguments for calling the minus update process are stored in the order of ER0 and R1L. That is, register 0, register 1, . . . are used. In this case, if there are more than a predetermined number of arguments, other areas such as the RAM 322 may be used together. In addition, in the processing shown in FIGS. 99 to 104, the argument when calling the plus update processing is E
They are stored in order of R0, R1L, R1H, and so on. In this way, two registers in the same hierarchy may be used in order, or registers in different hierarchies may be used one by one in order as described above.

In FIG. 109(d), the registers to be used are shown as Rx (where x is a number). Available. In addition, registers of different systems may be used in arbitrary combinations. For example, R0, E1, ER2, R3H, R3L, R4L, . . . may be used in this order. Alternatively, one system may be used from the beginning, such that E0 . . . E7 may be used after using R0 . . . In this case, only part of each system may be used, such as R4, R5, R6, E3, E4, E5, E6 and E7.

In addition, although it is assumed that they are used in order from the head, they may be used in order from the rear end.
Also, the order of registers used for return values and the order of registers used for arguments may be the same or different. Also, the order of registers used for arguments and return values may be determined according to the group set for each control process. For example, when calling a control process to which a group to which the control process belongs, the arguments are stored in registers according to the order set corresponding to the group to which the control process belongs.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a control means ( Effect control device 300), the control means comprises arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) having a plurality of registers, and one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed in another control process In this case, when a return value returned from one control process to another control process is stored in a register, the return value is stored in each of the plurality of registers according to a predetermined order. . Therefore, when developing each control process, the registers to be used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, which facilitates program verification and improves development efficiency.

Also, the control means sets the order of the codes assigned to each of the plurality of registers for identification. Therefore, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, and verification of the program is facilitated, so that efficiency of development can be improved. In the above embodiment, the codes assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers are ER0 to E
Each of the codes R7, E0 to E7, R0 to R7, R0H to R07, and R0L to R7L, with the register having the numeric part of 0 as the leading register and the increasing order of the numeric part as the forward order. rank is set. Therefore, in the above embodiment, it can be said that the control means sets the order from the head of the address in the order of the address of the register.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, control means (effect control device) for controlling the game 300), and the control means comprises an arithmetic processing means (
CPU 311) and a storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing control-related information, and when one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed in another control process, When storing a return value returned by one control process to another control process in a register,
Store return values in each of a plurality of registers in accordance with a predetermined order, and if there are more than a predetermined number of return values, store up to a predetermined number of return values in the plurality of registers in accordance with the order, and The above return values are stored in the storage means. therefore,
Even if there are many return values, it can be handled.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, control means (effect control device) for controlling the game 300), and the control means comprises an arithmetic processing means (
CPU 311), and when storing arguments set when one control process executes a call instruction to call another control process in a register, stores them in each of a plurality of registers according to a predetermined order. was made. Therefore, when developing each control process, the registers to be used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, which facilitates program verification and improves development efficiency.

Also, the control means sets the order of the codes assigned to each of the plurality of registers for identification. Therefore, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, and verification of the program is facilitated, so that efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, the control means includes storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information related to control,
When there are more than a predetermined number of arguments, the arguments up to the predetermined number are stored in the plurality of registers according to the order, and the arguments of the predetermined number or more are stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if there are many return values, it can be handled.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, control means (effect control device) for controlling the game 300), and the control means comprises an arithmetic processing means (
CPU 311), for some or all of a plurality of control processes, a group to which each control process belongs is predetermined to one of a plurality of groups, and when the group to which the control process belongs is executed, A register corresponding to the group to which the control process belongs is used. Therefore, when developing each control process, the registers to be used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, since it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, verification of the program is facilitated, and development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the control means predetermines the order for each of the plurality of groups, predetermines the order for each of the plurality of registers, and one control process corresponds to a call instruction executed in another control process. For those that have a relationship to be called, one control process belongs to a lower group than the other control process, and when the group to which the control process belongs executes a predetermined control process, the group to which the control process belongs This means that the registers of the order corresponding to the order are used. Therefore, when developing each control process, the registers to be used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, since it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, verification of the program is facilitated, and development efficiency can be improved.

In addition, when one control process returns a value to another control process, the control means returns the value using the register whose order corresponds to the order of the group to which the one control process belongs. .
Therefore, when setting the register for storing the return value, it is sufficient to set it according to the group, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, control means (game control device) for controlling the game 100, production control device 300), the control means includes a first control process,
a second control process called in response to a first call instruction executed in the first control process;
A third control process called in response to the second call instruction executed in the control process, and a fourth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the second control process and the third control process. , is executable. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process is clarified, and the states of arguments and return values can be easily grasped, and development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the control means includes a fifth control process called in response to a fourth call instruction executed in the first control process, and a fifth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the fifth control process. 4 control processing can be executed. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process is clarified, and the states of arguments and return values can be easily grasped, and development efficiency can be improved.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(a), the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the second control process is different from the first and second control processes. The third control process can be called, and the first control process can directly call the third control process. A fourth control process different from the first to third control processes can call a fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, and the fifth control process calls the third control process. It is also possible for the fourth control process to directly call the third control process.

In this relationship, the first control process and the fourth control process belong to the first group, and the second and fifth control processes called by the control process belonging to the first group belong to the second group. A third control process called by a control process belonging to the second group belongs to the third group.

In the process of the game control device 100, the modifications shown in FIGS. 57 to 60 correspond, special figure 1
Game processing (Fig. 19) as the first control processing, Special figure 1 displaying processing (Fig. 57) as the second control processing, 2 byte data acquisition processing (Fig. 52) as the third control processing, Special figure 2 game Processing (FIGS. 20 and 21) can be associated with the fourth control processing, and processing during special figure 2 display (FIG. 58) can be associated with the fifth control processing.

It is also possible to associate the effect command setting process (FIG. 56), which may be called from a plurality of control processes, as the third control process. For example, special figure 1 game processing (Fig. 19)
is associated with the first control process, and the special figure 2 game process (FIGS. 20 and 21) is associated with the fourth control process. processing, special figure 2 normal processing) are respectively set as the second and fifth control processing (not shown), and the effect command setting processing (FIG. 56) called from the second and fifth control processing can be associated as the third control processing. It is possible. In addition, the general pattern game processing (FIG. 50) is associated with the fourth control processing, the general pattern normal processing called by this general pattern game processing is set as the fifth control processing, and the production command setting processing ( 56) as the third control process.

In the processing of the effect control device 300, the hole setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is changed to the first control processing,
The player sets the hall sound volume adjustment process (FIG. 79) and the hall LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 80) as the second control process, and the minus update process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85) as the third control process. The mode process (FIG. 81) can be associated with the fourth control process, the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) with the fifth control process, and the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83) with the fifth control process.

Note that the third control process may be called in common by the first control process and the second control process, which are groups different from the third control process. Therefore, in the process of calling the third control process from the first control process, one or a plurality of steps of the control process may be called.
Between the control process and the second control process, or between the second control process and the third control process, one or more stages of control process calls may be interposed.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a control means ( A game control device 100, a performance control device 300), and the control means includes a first control process, a second control process called in response to a first call command executed in the first control process, and a first control and the third control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the process and the second control process. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process is clarified, and the states of arguments and return values can be easily grasped, and development efficiency can be improved.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, control means (game control device) for controlling the game 100, production control device 300), the control means includes a first control process,
a second control process called in response to a first call instruction executed in the first control process;
A fourth control process different from the control process and the second control process, a fifth control process called in response to a second call instruction executed in the fourth control process, a first control process, and a second control process , the third control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the fourth control process and the fifth control process. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process is clarified, and the states of arguments and return values can be easily grasped, and development efficiency can be improved.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(b), it is possible for the first control process to call a second control process different from the first control process as the A process in the first period, and the second control process calls the first control process. and second
A third control process different from the control process can be called, and the first control process can directly call the third control process.

In this relationship, the first control process belongs to the first group, and the second and third control processes called by this first control process belong to the second group. Also, the fourth, fifth, and sixth control processes called by the control processes belonging to the second group belong to the third group.

In a second period different from the first period, as B process, the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the second control process can call the first control process and the second control process. It is possible to call a third control process that is different from the process. The second control process can call a fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, and the third control process can call the first control process.
can call a sixth control process different from the fifth control process.

In the processing of the game control device 100, timer interrupt processing (Fig. 1
1) as the first control process, special figure 1 game process (FIG. 19) as the second control process, special figure 2 game process (FIGS. 20 and 21) as the third control process, fanfare/interval processing ( Figure 42
) can be associated with the fourth control process. That is, the first period is a period during execution of the special game state. Then, as B processing in the second period, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (Fig. 24 (a
)) can be associated with the fifth control process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 24(b)) can be associated with the sixth control process. That is, the second period is a period during execution of the special figure variation display game.

Note that the first period and the second period are not limited to those described above. For example, it may be further subdivided into a fanfare period or a round period in the special game state,
The number of periods may be three or more.

In addition, hole setting mode processing (FIG. 78) and player setting mode processing (FIG. 81) can be called in response to a call command executed in the main processing (FIG. 63). As described above, the hole setting mode process (FIG. 78) and the player setting mode process (FIG. 81) can call control processes having the relationship shown in FIG. 109(a). It can also be said that there is a relationship shown in FIG. 110(c) collectively.

That is, in the processing of the effect control device 300, the main processing (FIG. 63) is associated with the first control processing, the hole setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is associated with the second control processing, and the player setting mode processing (FIG. 81) is associated with the third control process. Also, the hall sound volume adjustment process (Fig. 79
) or hall LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 80) is associated with the fourth control processing, and player volume adjustment processing (FIG. 82) or player LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 83) is associated with the fifth control processing.
Then, the minus update process (FIG. 84) or the plus update process (FIG. 85) can be associated with the sixth control process. In addition, from the second control process and the third control process to the fourth control process and the fifth control process
It is also possible to call the sixth control process without going through the control process.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a control means ( A performance control device 300) is provided, and the control means executes the first control process, the second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and the first control process. A third control process called in response to the second call instruction, a fourth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the second control process, and a fourth control process executed in the third control process being able to execute a fifth control process called in response to a call instruction, and a sixth control process called in response to a fifth call instruction executed in the fourth control process and the fifth control process; Become. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process is clarified, and the states of arguments and return values can be easily grasped, and development efficiency can be improved.

[First modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted, and different portions are mainly described. The gaming machine of this modified example is capable of executing a specific effect whose content changes according to the player's operation input.

FIG. 111 shows an example of the specific effect in this modified example. In this specific effect, if the character 80 makes a tee shot and makes a hole-in-one, it is indicated that a big hit is achieved. The player operates the touch panel 29 to
You can adjust the strength of the shot made by.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), in the specific effect, an explanation display 81 for explaining the content of the effect is displayed in the upper central portion of the display area. Also, a meter display 82 indicating the strength of force that changes according to the operation of the touch panel 29 is displayed in the left part of the display area. In this meter display 82, the center is taken as a reference value, and the force increases from the reference value as the meter extends upward, and the force decreases below the reference value as the meter extends downward. is shown.

Further, at the lower center of the display area, an operation explanation display 83 indicating how to operate the touch panel 29 is displayed.
is displayed, and an operable time display 84 indicating the operable time is displayed above the operation explanation display 83 . The operable time is set so that the variable time of the special figure variable display game ends after the specific effect ends.

A start memory display section 86 for displaying the number of start memories is provided in the lower right portion of the display area. In the starting memory display section 86, the numerical value on the left side indicates the first starting memory number, and the numerical value on the right side indicates the second starting memory number.
It is designed to indicate the number of starting memories. In addition, below the starting memory display unit 86, the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 8 for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game
8 is provided.

When the operable time expires as shown in FIG. 111(b), the operation explanation display 83 and the operable time display 84 are erased. Here, the meter display 82 indicates that the player has been operated to perform a shot with a force that is three levels stronger than the reference value. After that, the character makes a shot, and if the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss, an effect is performed in which the ball does not enter the cup as shown in FIG. 111(c). In this effect, since the shot was performed with a force stronger than the reference value, the effect is performed in which the ball goes over the cup and comes off.
If the shot is performed with a force weaker than the reference value, an effect is performed in which the ball misses the cup without reaching it. Of course, it is also possible to select a deviating effect regardless of whether the adjusted force is stronger or weaker than the reference value. Also, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big win, an effect is performed in which the ball enters the cup as shown in FIG. 111(d), and a special result is derived. The meter display 82 shows the result of the specific effect shown in FIGS. 111(c) and (d).
) continues to be displayed until the production ends.

Although the specific effect is performed in one special figure variation display game, it may be performed across a plurality of special figure variation display games. For example, it is possible to set the operable time across a plurality of special figure variation display games, and suggest or notify the result of the special figure variation display game that will end the operable time. In this case, the result of the specific effect may be determined according to the look-ahead result at the start of the specific effect, or the result of the special figure fluctuation display game may be determined when the operable time ends. The result of the production may be determined, or the result of the specific production may be determined based on the result of the special figure variation display game at the start of the special figure variation display game when the operable time ends. can be

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the main process shown in FIG. 63, the main process shown in FIG. 112 is performed. In this main process, a specific effect process for performing the process related to the specific effect as described above is performed (step C701).

[Specific effect processing]
FIG. 113 shows specific effect processing called in response to a call command executed in the main processing described above. In this specific effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in an adjustable state (step C711
). If it is not in the adjustable state (step C711; N), the specific effect processing is terminated. If the adjustment is possible (step C711; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation to lower the meter (step C712). The operation of lowering the meter is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 .

If there is no operation to lower the meter (step C712; N), the process proceeds to step C718. Also, if there is an operation to lower the meter (step C712; Y), the address of the performance meter area for storing the value to be displayed on the meter display 82 is prepared (step C713),
The lower limit value of the meter is prepared (step C714), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit value) is prepared (step C715). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C71
6) Set effect meter display information corresponding to the updated value (step C717). The minus update process is the process shown in FIG. As a result, the meter is lowered on the meter display 82 each time the meter is lowered. In addition, even if the meter is lowered when the meter is at its minimum value, the value remains at the minimum value.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to raise the meter (step C718). The operation of raising the meter is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no operation to raise the meter (step C718; N), the specific effect processing is terminated. If there is an operation to raise the meter (step C718; Y), the address of the effect meter area is prepared (step C719), the upper limit value of the meter is prepared (step C720), and the set value after reaching the upper limit is prepared. (upper limit here) is prepared (step C721).

Then, plus update processing is performed (step C722), and effect meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C723). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG. As a result, the meter is raised on the meter display 82 each time the meter is raised. Also, even if the meter is raised when the meter is at its maximum, the maximum value remains. It should be noted that when there is an operation to lower or raise the meter, an operation sound may be output with a volume corresponding to the value of the meter.

In addition, the above-described specific effect accompanying the player's operation is not limited to the effect performed during execution of the special figure variation display game. For example, in the special game state, it is executed over multiple rounds, and if the player can operate to increase the meter to a certain amount/maximum, it will be in a high probability state or enter a small win RUSH state. It can be a production that suggests or notifies.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first modified example, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different portions will be explained. The gaming machine of this modified example allows the player to set adjustable items in the specific effect.

FIG. 114 shows an example of the specific effect in this modified example. Basically, it is the same as the specific effect in the first modified example, but the player himself/herself can select items that the player can adjust. This selection is made in a player setting selection mode as shown in FIG. 120(b).
In the specific effect, the player can select whether or not to enable adjustment of two types of adjustment items, ie, a first adjustment item and a second adjustment item. "Adjustment method 1" allows adjustment of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item, "Adjustment method 2" allows adjustment of only the first adjustment item, and "Adjustment method 3" allows adjustment of only the second adjustment item. "Adjustment method 4
, both reconciling items are not reconcilable.

FIG. 114(a) shows a case where the adjustment method 1 is selected, which enables adjustment by increasing the force that constitutes the first adjustment item and decreasing the force that constitutes the second adjustment item. FIG. 114(b) shows the case where the adjustment method 2 is selected, and only the adjustment for reducing the force forming the first adjustment item is possible. An adjustment that increases the force that constitutes the second adjustment item is not possible, and a hidden display 85 that hides the meter display is provided in the portion where the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item is displayed. In this hidden display 85, it is possible to execute suggestions and notifications regarding the special figure variation display game. Also, in this case, only the lower area of the touch panel 29 can be operated, but if the lower area of the touch panel 29 is further operated while the force is set to the minimum value, the force returns to the reference value. there is Of course, the upper and lower areas of the touch panel 29 may be operated, and the operation to increase or decrease the force within the range of the reference value or less may be made possible.

FIG. 114(c) shows the case where the adjustment method 3 is selected, and only the adjustment for increasing the force constituting the second adjustment item is possible. Adjustments that reduce the force that constitutes the first adjustment item are not possible,
A hidden display 85 for hiding the meter display is provided in a portion where the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item is displayed. Also, in this case, only the upper region of the touch panel 29 can be operated, but if the upper region of the touch panel 29 is further operated while the force is at its maximum value, the force returns to the reference value. there is Of course, the upper and lower areas of the touch panel 29 may be operated so that the force can be increased or decreased within a range equal to or greater than the reference value.

FIG. 114(d) shows the case where adjustment method 4 is selected, and the adjustment to decrease the force that constitutes the first adjustment item and the adjustment to increase the force that constitutes the second adjustment item are not allowed. Meter display 82
is displayed, a hidden display 85 for hiding the meter display is provided.

[Hall setting mode processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, the process shown in FIG. 115 is performed in place of the hole setting mode process shown in FIG. In this hole setting mode process, a custom setting process (step C731) is performed to set whether or not the adjustment method itself can be selected as described above.

[Custom setting processing]
FIG. 116 shows the custom setting process called in response to the call command executed in the hall setting mode process described above. In this custom setting process, first, it is determined whether the custom setting is possible (step C741). A state in which a custom setting is possible means a state in which a custom setting item displayed as a selectable item in this modified example is selected on the hole setting screen and a selection screen as shown in FIG. 120(a) is displayed. be.

If the custom setting is not possible (step C741; N), the custom setting process is terminated. If the custom setting is possible (step C741; Y), it is determined whether there is upward cursor operation as processing for selecting an item (step C742).
. The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no upward cursor operation (step C742; N), the process proceeds to step C747. again,
If there is an upward cursor operation (step C742; Y), the address of the custom setting item area is prepared (step C743), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C7
44). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C745), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C746). The minus update process is the process shown in FIG.

On the custom setting screen shown in FIG. 120(a), values are associated with the items "valid", "invalid", and "return", and the items are arranged in ascending order from the top. "Valid" is a setting that allows the player to select the adjustment content in the specific effect, and "Invalid" is a setting that the player cannot select the adjustment content in the specific effect. Each time the upward cursor is operated, items with smaller corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the custom setting screen. Also, when the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the custom setting screen), if you move the cursor upward, the item with the largest value will be selected and the custom The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the setting screen.

Returning to FIG. 116, next, it is determined whether there is downward cursor operation (step C747).
. The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no downward cursor operation (step C747; N), the process proceeds to step C753. again,
If there is a downward cursor operation (step C747; Y), the address of the custom setting item area is prepared (step C748), the upper limit value of the custom setting item is prepared (step C749), and the setting after reaching the upper limit is performed. A value is prepared (step C750). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C751), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C752). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG.

Each time the downward cursor is operated, items with larger corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the custom setting screen. Also, when the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the custom setting screen), if the cursor is moved downward, the item with the smallest value is selected and the custom The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the setting screen.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation operation (step C753). The confirm operation is "Enable"
Alternatively, it is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 while the cursor is on any item of "invalid". If there is no confirmation operation (step C753; N), the custom setting process is terminated. Note that even if there is an operation to touch the left or right area of the touch panel 29 while the cursor is on the item "return", it is assumed that there is no confirmation operation. If there is a confirm operation (step C753; Y), it is determined whether the confirmation operation is performed by selecting a valid item (step C754).

If the confirmation operation is performed by selecting a valid item (step C754; Y), in order to set a custom flag for setting whether custom setting is possible (state in which custom setting is possible),
The ON setting process (step C755), which is a common process for setting the target flag, is called and executed, and then the custom setting process is terminated. If the confirmation operation is not performed by selecting the valid item (step C754; N), that is, if the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the "invalid" item, a custom flag for setting whether custom setting is possible or not is set. In order to clear (a state in which custom setting is not possible), the OFF setting process (step C756), which is a common process for clearing the target flag, is called and executed, and then the custom setting process ends.
That is, in the custom setting process, settings selected during the process are fixed.

[Player Setting Mode Processing]
FIG. 117 shows the player setting mode process called in response to the call command executed in the main process described above. In this modification, instead of the player setting mode process shown in FIG. 81, the process shown in FIG. 117 is performed. In this player setting mode process, it is determined whether or not there is a custom flag set in the custom setting process described above, that is, whether or not the player is able to select adjustment contents in a specific effect (step C761).

If there is no custom flag (step C761; N), the process proceeds to step C588. Also, if there is a custom flag (step C761; Y), the player custom setting process (step C7
62) is called and executed.

[Player custom setting process]
FIG. 118 shows the player custom setting process called in response to the call command executed in the player setting mode process described above. In this player custom setting process, first, it is determined whether the player custom setting is possible (step C771). The state in which the player's custom setting is possible means that a player's custom setting item displayed as a selectable item in this modified example is selected on the player's setting mode screen, and a selection screen such as that shown in FIG. 120(b) is displayed. in the displayed state.

If the player custom setting is not possible (step C771; N), the player custom setting process is terminated. Also, if the player custom setting is possible (step C771
; Y) determines whether there is an upward cursor operation as a process for selecting an item (
Step C772). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no upward cursor operation (step C772; N), step C777
transition to If there is an upward cursor operation (step C772; Y), the address of the player's custom setting item area is prepared (step C773), and the set value after reaching the lower limit of the player's custom setting item is prepared (step C773). Step C774). Then, minus update processing is performed (step C775), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C776). The minus update process is the process shown in FIG.

In the player custom setting screen shown in FIG. 120(b), values correspond to the items of "adjustment method 1", "adjustment method 2", "adjustment method 3", "adjustment method 4", and "return". The items are arranged in descending order from the top. Each time an upward cursor operation is performed, items with smaller corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the player custom setting screen. Also, when the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the custom setting screen), if the upward cursor is operated, the item with the largest value will be selected and the game will be played. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the User Custom Settings screen.

Returning to FIG. 118, next, it is determined whether there is downward cursor operation (step C777).
. The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 . If there is no downward cursor operation (step C777; N), the process proceeds to step C783. again,
If there is a downward cursor operation (step C777; Y), the address of the player custom setting item area is prepared (step C778), the upper limit value of the player custom setting item is prepared (step C779), and the upper limit A set value after arrival is prepared (step C780). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C781), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C782). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG.

Each time the downward cursor is operated, an item with a large corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the player custom setting screen. Also, when the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the player custom setting screen), if the downward cursor is operated, the item with the smallest value will be selected. to move the cursor to the item displayed at the top of the player custom setting screen.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there has been a confirmation operation (step C783). The confirmation operation is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 while the cursor is on any one of "adjustment method 1", "adjustment method 2", "adjustment method 3", and "adjustment method 4". . If there is no confirmation operation (step C783; N), the player custom setting process is terminated. In addition, "return"
Even if there is an operation to touch the left or right area of the touch panel 29 while the cursor is on the item (1), it is assumed that there is no confirmation operation. Also, if there is a confirmation operation (step C783; Y)
determines whether it is a confirmation operation by selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784).

The first flag is a flag that sets whether or not the adjustment of the first adjustment item is possible. The confirmation operation by selecting the item for which the first flag is set to ON is an adjustment method that enables the adjustment of the first adjustment item. This is the case where the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 1 or 2. When the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784; Y), the first flag is turned ON.
In order to set the state (the state in which the first adjustment item can be adjusted), the ON setting processing (step C785), which is a common processing for setting the target flag, is called and executed, and step C7
Go to 87. If the confirmation operation is not performed by selecting the item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784; N), that is, if the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 3 or 4, the first flag is turned on. In order to set the OFF state (the state in which the first adjustment item cannot be adjusted), the OFF setting processing (step C786), which is a common processing for clearing the target flag, is called and executed, and the process proceeds to step C787.

Next, it is determined whether the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787). The second flag is a flag that sets whether or not the adjustment of the second adjustment item is possible. The confirmation operation by selecting the item for which the second flag is set to ON is an adjustment method that enables the adjustment of the second adjustment item. This is the case where the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 1 or 3. If the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787; Y),
In order to set the second flag to the ON state (the state in which the second adjustment item can be adjusted), the ON setting processing (step C788), which is the common processing for setting the target flag, is called and executed, and then the game is played. end the user custom setting process. If the confirmation operation is not performed by selecting the item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787; N), that is, if the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 2 or 4, the second flag is turned on. In order to set the OFF state (the state in which the second adjustment item cannot be adjusted), the OFF setting processing (step C789), which is a common processing for clearing the target flag, is called and executed, and then the player custom setting processing. exit. That is, in the player custom setting process, the settings selected during the process are fixed.

In addition, in the custom setting process, not only whether or not the player is allowed to select the adjustment content for the specific effect, but also the adjustment method that can be selected by the player may be selected. For example, a setting may be made such that only adjustment methods 1 and 4 are selectable. In addition, when the custom setting is invalidated so that the player cannot select the adjustment content in the specific effect, it may be possible to select which adjustment method is used to execute the specific effect.

[Specific effect processing]
Further, in this modified example, a specific effect process shown in FIG. 119 is performed instead of the specific effect process shown in FIG. In this specific effect process, the first
It is determined whether there is a flag (step C791). If the first flag is present (step C791; Y), that is, if the adjustment of the first adjustment item is possible, then the processing after step C712, which is the processing for adjusting the first adjustment item, is performed. The first adjustment item here is the adjustment to reduce the force. As the set value after reaching the lower limit value of the first meter, a different value is set depending on the selected adjustment method. Touch panel 29 for adjustment method 1
Since adjustment is performed by operating the upper or lower area of , the set value after the lower limit is reached is the lower limit. On the other hand, in the case of adjustment method 2, adjustment is performed only by operating the lower area of the touch panel 29, so the setting value after reaching the lower limit value is set to 0 (reference value).

If there is no first flag (step C791; N), that is, if the adjustment of the first adjustment item is not possible, the first meter hidden image information is displayed without performing adjustment processing corresponding to the first adjustment item. is set (step C792). The first adjustment item here is the adjustment to reduce the force, and the first meter concealment image conceals the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment to reduce the force as shown in FIGS. 114(c) and (d). A hidden image 85 is shown. The image for suggesting or notifying the special figure variation display game displayed in the concealment image 85 may be set here, or an image selected in a separate process may be arranged.

Furthermore, in this specific effect process, it is determined whether or not there is a second flag indicating whether or not the second adjustment item can be adjusted (step C793). If there is this second flag (step C
793; Y), that is, if the adjustment of the second adjustment item is possible, the process after step C718, which is the process of performing the adjustment corresponding to the second adjustment item, is performed. The second adjustment item here is adjustment to increase the force. As the set value after reaching the upper limit value of the second meter, a different value is set depending on the selected adjustment method. In the case of adjustment method 1, since the adjustment is performed by operating the upper or lower area of the touch panel 29, the setting value after reaching the upper limit value is the upper limit value. On the other hand, in the case of adjustment method 3, adjustment is performed only by operating the upper region of the touch panel 29, so the set value after reaching the upper limit value is set to 0 (reference value).

If there is no second flag (step C793; N), that is, if the adjustment of the second adjustment item is not possible, the second meter hidden image information is displayed without performing the adjustment process corresponding to the second adjustment item. is set (step C794). The second adjustment item here is the adjustment to increase the force, and the second meter concealment image conceals the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment to increase the force as shown in FIGS. 114(b) and (d). A hidden image 85 is shown. The image for suggesting or notifying the special figure variation display game displayed in the concealment image 85 may be set here, or an image selected in a separate process may be arranged.

Although the first meter allows the operation to lower the value and the second meter allows the operation to raise the value, the present invention is not limited to this. As long as it is possible to independently change the values of the first meter and the second meter, the value may be changed in either direction. Therefore, both the operation for the first meter and the operation for the second meter may increase the value. In this way, the same subroutine is called for common processing. Processing can be called, and only the plus update processing can be called in the specific effect processing. Even if both the operation on the first meter and the operation on the second meter decrease the value, only the minus update process can be called in the specific effect process.

Also, the change in the value inside the control device due to the operation does not necessarily have to match the change in the performance. For example, the value inside the control device increases with the operation, but the force may decrease in the presentation. In this way, for example, both the operation on the first meter and the operation on the second meter can be updated to increase the value inside the control device. may be called. Of course, it is also possible to call only the minus update process assuming that the value inside the control device decreases. The change in performance can be set to either increase or decrease by setting the correspondence with the value inside the control device.

It is also possible to assign other adjustment items as the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item. For example, as shown in FIG. 121, the direction of hitting the ball may be assigned as the first adjustment item, and the force of hitting the ball may be assigned as the second adjustment item. Also, for items that cannot be adjusted, "AUTO" may be displayed so that the gaming machine automatically adjusts them. This display is performed by one or both of the hidden display and the explanation display 81 .

Also, in the custom setting, whether or not to select an adjustment item for a specific effect is set, but other contents may be selectable. Also, in the player custom setting, adjustment items are selected, but other contents may be selectable. For example, in custom settings or player custom settings, it is possible to select the attribute of a character that appears in a specific effect, and set a flag corresponding to the selection in ON processing or OFF processing. The character's dialogue A may be displayed, and when the option B is selected, the character's dialogue B may be displayed. In addition, in custom settings or player custom settings, the character itself that appears in a specific effect can be selected, and ON setting processing and O
A flag corresponding to the selection may be set in the FF setting process. Also, although the ON setting process and the OFF setting process are separate processes called by separate call instructions, they may be collectively carried out as one process called by one call instruction.

FIG. 122 shows the relationship between the control processes described above. The first control process is the production control device 3
00 corresponds to the main process (FIG. 112), and the second control process called in response to the first call command executed in this first control process corresponds to the player setting mode process (FIG. 117). Also, the third control process called in response to the second call instruction executed in the first control process corresponds to the specific effect process (FIG. 119), and corresponds to the third call instruction executed in the second control process. Then, the fourth control process called corresponds to the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) or the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83).

Further, a fifth control process called in response to a fourth call instruction executed in the third control process and the fourth control process, and a fifth call instruction executed in the third control process and the fourth control process The sixth control process called is the minus update process (FIG. 84) or the plus update process (FIG. 8
4). Whether the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction are executed in the third control process to call the fifth control process and the sixth control process corresponds to the sixth call instruction executed in the second control process. 7th control processing (player custom setting processing (Fig. 118
)). Note that in the seventh control process, the fourth call instruction and the fifth
Whether or not to execute each call instruction may be determined, or whether or not to execute the fourth and fifth call instructions together may be determined.

The eighth control process called in response to the seventh call instruction executed in the first control process corresponds to the hole setting mode process (FIG. 115), and the eighth control process corresponds to the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction.
Minus update process (FIG. 84) which is the fifth control process and the sixth control process by executing the call instruction
Or it is possible to call the plus update process (Fig. 84). Furthermore, whether the sixth call instruction is executed in the second control process and the seventh control process is called is determined by the ninth control process (custom Setting process (Fig. 1
16)) can be determined.

Further, the seventh control process and the ninth control process can call the ON setting process or the OFF setting process, which are the tenth control process and the eleventh control process, by executing the ninth call instruction and the tenth call instruction. be. The group for defining the registers to be used for the tenth and eleventh control processes may be the same group as the fifth and sixth control processes, or may be a higher or lower group. Also good.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a control means ( A performance control device 300) is provided, and the control means executes the first control process, the second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and the first control process. a third control process called in response to the second call instruction; a fourth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the second control process; a fifth control process that is called in response to the fourth call instruction that is executed by Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process is clarified, and the states of arguments and return values can be easily grasped, and development efficiency can be improved.

Also, the control means can execute a sixth control process called in response to a fifth call instruction executed in the third control process and the fourth control process. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process is clarified, and the states of arguments and return values can be easily grasped, and development efficiency can be improved.

Also, the control means corresponds to the seventh control process called in response to the sixth call instruction which executes in the second control process whether to execute the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction in the third control process. can be determined by Therefore, since it becomes possible to control whether or not a call instruction executed by one control process is permitted by another control process, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the specification can be changed without changing the relationship of each control process, and the efficiency of development can be improved without changing the state of arguments and return values. In the seventh control process, it is possible to decide whether to execute the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction respectively, or to decide whether to execute the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction together. Also good.

Also, the control means can execute an eighth control process called in response to a seventh call instruction executed in the first control process, and the eighth control process calls a fourth call instruction and a fifth call instruction. It is executable, and whether the sixth call instruction is executed in the second control process can be determined in correspondence with the tenth control process called in response to the ninth call instruction executed in the eighth control process. It will happen. Therefore, since it becomes possible to control whether or not a call instruction executed by one control process is permitted by another control process, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the specification can be changed without changing the relationship of each control process, and the efficiency of development can be improved without changing the state of arguments and return values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 123, the increase operation and the decrease operation may be separate operations for each of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item. In this example, touch panel 2 is the first adjustment item.
9 can be increased or decreased by operating the right area and left area, and the second adjustment item can be increased or decreased by operating the upper area and lower area of the touch panel 29 . In this case, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment in the direction corresponding to the first adjustment item extends in the horizontal direction corresponding to the layout of the operation portion of the touch panel 29. , the meter display 82 corresponding to the force adjustment corresponding to the second adjustment item may extend in the vertical direction corresponding to the layout of the operation portion of the touch panel 29 .

Then, when only the first adjustment item is adjustable, as shown in FIG. 123(b), the second
"(AUTO)" is displayed on the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item. In addition, the concealment image is also displayed in the explanation portion corresponding to the second adjustment item in the operation explanation display 83 . In this case,
In the image showing the operation portion of the touch panel 29, the display indicating the positions of the upper and lower regions in which the operation is disabled is maintained, but may be deleted. Further, in the explanation display 81, "(AUTO)" is displayed after "strength" which is the second adjustment item.

Similarly, when only the second adjustment item is adjustable, as shown in FIG. 123(c),
“(AUTO)” is displayed on the meter display 82 , the operation explanation display 83 and the explanation display 81 . In addition, "(AUTO)" is displayed superimposed on the arrow indicating the hitting direction. When the adjustment of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item is prohibited, "(AUTO)" is displayed in the portion corresponding to both adjustment items as shown in FIG. 123(d).

When there is an adjustment item that cannot be adjusted, a hidden display that hides all the corresponding parts on both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83 will give a sense of oppression. Only the operation explanation display 83 to be referred to is displayed by concealing all the corresponding parts to make it difficult to make a mistake in operation, and the meter display 82 is displayed only with characters "(AUTO)" so that the feeling of oppression does not occur. I'm trying Of course, both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83 may be displayed in such a manner as to hide all the corresponding portions.
Concealed display is performed to hide all the parts corresponding to only 2, and the operation explanation display 83 displays "(AUT
Only the characters "O)" may be displayed, or both the meter display 82 and the operation instruction display 83 may display only the characters "(AUTO)".

[Specific effect processing]
As shown in FIG. 123, for each of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item, when the increase operation and the decrease operation are separate operations, the specific effect processing shown in FIG. 119 is replaced with FIG.
4 is performed. In this specific effect processing, if there is a first flag (step C791; Y), processing related to the operation of lowering the first meter corresponding to the first adjustment item (steps C712 to C716) and Processing (steps C718 to C722) relating to the operation of raising the first meter is performed.

If there is a first flag (step C791; Y), first, the contents of the first meter area are loaded (step C801), and the first meter display information corresponding to the pre-update value is set (step C801). C802). In this example, when the specific effect ends, the adjusted value is saved without being initialized, and by this process, the adjustment result of the previous specific effect is set and displayed at the start of the new specific effect. The Rukoto. If the value after adjustment is initialized when the specific effect ends, the value always starts from the reference value when the specific effect starts.

Similarly, for the second flag, if there is a second flag (step C793; Y), processing related to the operation of lowering the second meter corresponding to the second adjustment item (steps C712 to C71
6) and a process related to the operation of raising the second meter corresponding to the second adjustment item (step C71
8 to C722).

If there is a second flag (step C793; Y), first, the contents of the second meter area are loaded (step C804), and the second meter display information corresponding to the pre-update value is set (step C804). C805). In this example, when the specific effect ends, the adjusted value is saved without being initialized, and by this process, the adjustment result of the previous specific effect is set and displayed at the start of the new specific effect. The Rukoto.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when the adjustment of the volume and brightness using the operation of the touch panel 29 overlaps with the specific effect. FIG. 125 shows an example in which the specific effect is started while the player is operating the touch panel 29 to adjust the volume and brightness. In this example, the player can adjust the volume and brightness by operating the touch panel 29 even during execution of the special figure variation display game.

In FIG. 125(a), adjustment operation of volume and brightness is performed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and adjustment display 89, which is a display indicating volume and brightness, is performed on the display device 41. FIG. The adjustment of the volume increases by operating the upper area of the touch panel 29, and decreases by operating the lower area. Further, the adjustment of the brightness increases by operating the right area of the touch panel 29 and decreases by operating the left area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 125(b), the specific effect is started while this adjustment display 89 is being displayed. In this example, the operation of decreasing the force, which is the first adjustment item, can be performed by operating the lower area of the touch panel 29 . This operation overlaps the operation of decreasing the volume. 125(c) to (e) are examples of how to handle the case where there is an operation in the lower area of the touch panel 29, which is an overlapping operation in such a situation.

The example shown in FIG. 125(c) is an example in which both the value decrease and volume decrease are performed in the specific effect. The example shown in FIG. 125(d) is an example in which only volume reduction is performed. Figure 12
The example shown in 5(e) is an example in which only the value is decreased in the specific effect. Any one of these modes can be adopted. Moreover, it is also possible to disable adjustment of the volume and brightness during execution of the specific effect.

Note that if there is an operation in the upper area of the touch panel 29, which is an operation that does not overlap, the volume is increased. In addition, when there is an operation in the left and right regions of the touch panel 29, which is an operation that does not overlap, the luminance is increased or decreased. However, in the case where the volume and brightness are not adjusted when overlapping operations are performed (for example, in the case of FIG. 125(e)), the volume and brightness are not adjusted even when there are non-overlapping operations. Adjustment may be omitted.

Also, in this example, the meter display 82 for the specific effect and the adjustment display 89 for volume and brightness are shown in the same display mode, but they may be displayed in different modes. For example, the number of scales on the meter display 82 may be different from the volume and brightness adjustment display 89, and the color saturation and brightness of the scales on the meter display 82 and the adjustment display 89 may be different. Further, the operation of the touch panel 29 used for the specific effect and the operation of the touch panel 29 used for adjusting the volume and brightness may not overlap.

Note that the adjustment display 89 for volume adjustment and the adjustment display 89 for brightness adjustment are not only the same in number of scales, but also have different numbers of scales (for example, volume is 10 scales and brightness is 3 scales).
For example, the brightness may be set to 10 scale instead of 0 scale). In addition, a predetermined sound may be output according to the increase/decrease of the scale of the volume and brightness (for example, if it increases, it changes to do-re-mi-fa-so-ra-shi-do-re-mi, and if it decreases, it reverses the increase). Although the predetermined sound is output at the volume (the volume that changes in real time) when the brightness is increased or decreased, it may be output at the volume corresponding to the current volume (the volume set before the brightness adjustment). In addition, the display mode of the scale (color, transmittance, direction, etc.) of the scale may be different for volume control and brightness control. again,
Such an adjustment display 89 can also be applied to the hole setting screen and the player setting screen shown in FIG.

Also, in the player custom setting process that can be executed when the customer is waiting for a customer, etc., the first flag or the second flag is set to ON or OFF. It may also be possible to set the first flag or the second flag to ON or OFF even in a state other than the waiting state. By doing so, the degree of freedom in setting changes is increased, and the game content can be made to meet the desires of the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. For example, in the setting in the customer waiting state, I chose not to perform the operation in the specific production, but in the production that was executed before the specific production, the production with high expectations such as intense heat was executed. It is possible to meet the demands of players who want to operate the .

As an operation for performing such setting, for example, by performing an operation different from increasing or decreasing the meter display 82, such as long-pressing the effect button 25 during a specific effect, the first flag and the second flag are turned on.
You can set it to When the first flag and the second flag are changed to ON, the hidden image 85 interferes with the meter display 82 and should be deleted. For the explanation display 81, "(
The characters "(AUTO)" may be displayed without displaying the characters "(AUTO)", or the characters "(AUTO)" may be left as they are. A worm-eaten display with a blank portion may be displayed (only "(AUTO)" is erased), or a second concealment image that conceals "(AUTO)" may be displayed. Also, conversely,
The first flag and the second flag may be turned off by performing an operation different from increasing or decreasing the meter display 82, such as long-pressing the effect button 25 during the specific effect. In this case, it is desirable to display a concealment image or an image of "(AUTO)", but it may be left as it is.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 300 production control device (control means)
311 CPU (arithmetic processing means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Equipped with effect control means for controlling the game,
The production control means is
Arithmetic processing means comprising a plurality of registers ,
Predetermining a group to which each control process belongs to one of the plurality of groups for some or all of the plurality of control processes,
Predetermining an order for each of the groups, and predetermining an order for each of the registers corresponding to the order of the groups ;
Each of the registers has a first size that is a multiple byte size and is usable as a register of the first size, and a register of a second size that is smaller than the first size and is the same can also be used as multiple registers of rank ,
When predetermined control processes are in a relationship of calling one control process by a call instruction ,
When executing the one control process, the value stored in the register corresponding to the group to which the one control process belongs is saved in a RAM, and the group higher than the group to which the one control process belongs. without saving in the RAM the value stored in the register corresponding to
Further, when the predetermined control process passes a plurality of arguments to the one control process, even if the possible values of the plurality of arguments fit within the second size, the second control process of the same order storing in the second size register of a different order for each argument without storing in a register of the same size ;
Further, when the one control process returns a return value to the predetermined control process , the return value is stored in the register according to a predetermined order in each of the registers. machine. The production control means is
2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the ranking is set in the order of a code attached to identify each of the plurality of registers.

Images